Cheerful Choices

  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
×

4-Ingredient Goat Cheese Stuffed Dates

October 23, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

Need a quick, impressive holiday appetizer? These goat cheese stuffed dates are the answer! With just 4 ingredients-Medjool dates, goat cheese, pistachios, and pomegranate molasses-you can have a delicious treat in under 15 minutes. Plus, you can customize it with additional toppings like olive oil or herbs. 

Platter of goat cheese stuffed dates with herbs and pistachios.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Why are goat cheese stuffed dates healthy?
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make goat cheese stuffed dates ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this goat cheese stuffed date recipe on pinterest:
  • try these holiday-ready recipes too:

Why you'll love it

These goat cheese stuffed dates are one to keep in your back pocket for holiday parties! Here's why you'll love this recipe:

  • Super quick and easy: Ready in just 15 minutes, these savory stuffed dates are perfect for last-minute entertaining or that mid-afternoon snack craving.
  • Minimal ingredients: With only four key ingredients-many of which you probably already have in your pantry-you can whip these up anytime.
  • Customizable: Make them your own! Add a drizzle of honey, a sprinkle of flaky salt, or fresh herbs to elevate your goat cheese stuffed dates to the next level.
  • Versatile: Whether you're hosting a holiday gathering, throwing a party, or simply enjoying a fancy snack at home, these little bites are always a hit! 
Goat cheese stuffed date with pomegranate molasses being drizzled  on

Why are goat cheese stuffed dates healthy?

These goat cheese stuffed dates are balanced with all the good stuff-energizing carbs, protein, and healthy fats. Here's some impressive nutritional benefits of each ingredient: 

  • Medjool dates are filled with 7 grams of fiber per 4 pieces with zero added sugars, providing a quick energy boost while supporting digestive health. They're kinda like nature's candy! I personally always grab a box of Natural Delights Medjool dates-you can find them in the produce section of your local grocery store!
  • Pistachios have heart-healthy fats and essential vitamins, like B6, which research shows may play a role in supporting brain health.
  • Goat cheese is lower in lactose than traditional cow's milk cheeses if that's something you need to limit. Plus, it offers a good amount of calcium and protein.
  • Pomegranate molasses is a thick, tangy syrup made by reducing pomegranate juice. Pomegranate juice is rich in antioxidants and nutrients, which some research shows may help improve blood pressure levels. 
Up close of finished goat cheese stuffed date with herbs on top.

Ingredients you'll need

Here's what you'll need to make these delicious goat cheese stuffed dates:

  • Medjool dates: These soft and large dates are best for stuffing. You can usually find these in the produce or bulk section of your grocery store. They're even available at wholesale stores like Costco.
  • Pistachios: Roasted and lightly salted pistachios add a delightful crunch to each bite. Just roughly chop them up before adding.
  • Goat cheese: Opt for plain, soft goat cheese. Let it sit at room temperature for a bit to make mixing a breeze! 
  • Pomegranate molasses: This one may be a bit harder to find but it should be in the Middle Eastern section of your store. You can also order it online. We love using this one that's also lightly sweetened with dates. If you don't want to buy pomegranate molasses, you can use a plain or flavored honey in its place.
  • Optional toppings: For an extra layer of flavor, consider adding flaky salt, a drizzle of olive oil, fresh herbs, or a touch of honey. The choice is yours!
Multiple goat cheese stuffed dates on a platter with pistachios.

How to make goat cheese stuffed dates

These goat cheese stuffed dates come together in just a few easy steps:

  1. Prepare the dates: Start by making a lengthwise slit in each Medjool date and carefully remove the pit. Be gentle-you want to keep the date intact for stuffing and make sure not to cut the date all the way through.
  2. Mix the filling: In a small bowl, combine the goat cheese with ½ cup of chopped pistachios. Mix until everything is evenly blended.
  3. Stuff the dates: Add about 1 tablespoon of the goat cheese mixture and lovingly stuff it into each date. Don't be shy-these bites are meant to be flavorful!
  4. Drizzle and top: Give each stuffed date a sweet drizzle of pomegranate molasses (about ¼ teaspoon per date) and sprinkle the remaining chopped pistachios on top for that extra crunch.
  5. Optional toppings: Elevate your creation with a pinch of flaky salt, a drizzle of olive oil, or fresh herbs for extra flavor.
  6. Serve: Arrange your beautiful stuffed dates on a platter and serve immediately, or pop them in the fridge for later.
How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
How to make goat cheese stuffed dates
Holding up dates with goat cheese

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Suggestions: Elevate your appetizer game by pairing these goat cheese stuffed dates with sparkling wine or other light bites.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: 
    • If the goat cheese mixture is too firm to work with, let it sit at room temperature for a few extra minutes to soften.
    • If your dates tear while pitting, don't worry-simply press them back together after filling, and the stuffing will hold them in place.
    • Lastly, if the pomegranate molasses sinks into the cheese too quickly, drizzle it right before serving to maintain its vibrant presentation.
  • Scaling tips: This recipe is super flexible-feel free to double or triple it! Just increase the ingredients proportionally based on how many dates you need.
Goat cheese stuffed date on white platter topped with fresh herbs.

Customize it your way

Like all of my recipes, these goat cheese stuffed dates are completely customizable to fit your taste and dietary preferences! Here are some fun ways to make it your own:

  • Toppings of your choice: Try sprinkling over herbs like fresh thyme, parsley, or rosemary to add an earthy element. For a sweeter bite, add a drizzle of honey or maple syrup. For a more savory bite, sprinkle over a touch of salt and a drizzle of olive oil.
Over head view of goat cheese stuffed dates with pomegranate molasses drizzled about.

Can I make goat cheese stuffed dates ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prepare and stuff these goat cheese stuffed dates a few hours in advance, making them a convenient choice for entertaining. Just remember to hold off on adding the pomegranate molasses and any other toppings until right before serving to keep everything fresh and tasty. These delicious bites can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days.

We've frozen these bites and simply thawed them a couple of hours before serving-they're still just as delicious!

Close up of goat cheese stuffed date with fresh herbs and pistachios around.

How do I store leftovers?

If you happen to have leftover goat cheese stuffed dates (though I can't guarantee they'll last long!), simply store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. When ready to indulge again, you can enjoy them cold or let them come to room temperature for the best flavor experience.

You can also freeze them by placing the stuffed dates in a single layer on a baking sheet until firm, then transferring them to an airtight container or freezer bag. They'll keep for up to 1 month. When you're ready to serve, thaw them in the fridge for a few hours or at room temperature until softened.

White platter with 12 goat cheese stuffed dates and fresh herbs.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Stuffed Dates 2
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

4-Ingredient Goat Cheese Stuffed Dates

With just 4 ingredients-Medjool dates, goat cheese, pistachios, and pomegranate molasses-you can have a delicious treat in under 15 minutes. Plus, you can customize it with additional toppings like olive oil or herbs.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 16 stuffed dates
Calories: 120kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 16 Medjool dates pitted (about 1-12 ounce container)
  • ¾ cup roasted and shelled lightly salted pistachios roughly chopped
  • 4 ounce log plain goat cheese
  • 4 teaspoons pomegranate molasses
  • Optional toppings of your choice (Pinch of flakey salt, drizzle of olive oil, sprinkle of fresh herbs, or a drizzle of honey)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Use a knife to make a lengthwise slit in each Medjool date, being careful not to cut all the way through.
  • To a small bowl, add ½ cup of pistachios and goat cheese. Mix together with a fork until combined.
  • Add a spoonful of this goat cheese mixture to each halved date (about 1 tablespoon per date).
  • Drizzle with pomegranate molasses (about ¼ teaspoon per date) and top with a sprinkle of remaining pistachios. Feel free to add any additional toppings of your choice if desired as well.
  • Arrange on a serving platter and serve immediately, or store in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Notes

Nutrition Note:  This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation does not include optional toppings. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.
Softening Ingredients Note: If you have time, set your dates and goat cheese out at room temperature for about 10 minutes before starting this recipe. This will allow them to soften and be easier to work with.
Roasting Pistachios Note: If you have unroasted pistachios, you can easily toast them for extra flavor. Add the pistachios to a small pan over medium heat. Let toast for 3-5 minutes, stirring occasionally, until lightly browned.
Subbing Pomegranate Molasses Note: The pomegranate molasses tends to sink into the goat cheese quickly, so drizzle right before serving. If you can’t find pomegranate molasses, feel free to use a plain or flavored honey such as cinnamon honey.

Nutrition

Serving: 1date | Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 225mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Calcium: 32mg

save this goat cheese stuffed date recipe on pinterest:

Goat cheese stuffed dates - perfect for the holidays

try these holiday-ready recipes too:

  • Date Snickers
  • Individual Charcuterie Cups
  • Holiday Christmas Rice "Wreath"

Date Snickers

October 22, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

This Date Snickers recipe is a fun spin on a classic candy. Trust us-you'll be surprised how similar they taste! Our version calls for just 5 ingredients-Medjool dates, creamy peanut butter, crunchy peanuts, coconut oil, and melted chocolate of your choice. A perfect dessert for the holidays or Halloween!

Close up of Dates “Snickers”

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • How to pit dates
  • Can you freeze dates?
  • What are date snickers?
  • Are snickers dates healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize these chocolate covered dates
  • Can you make snicker dates ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • The perfect holiday dessert or halloween dessert
    • Try these other Medjool date recipe too:
    • save this date snickers recipe on pinterest:
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

Why you'll love it

These Date "Snickers" combine the caramel-like sweetness of Medjool dates with the irresistible flavor combo of peanuts and chocolate. You might be thinking… "Dates with chocolate??" But it really is a match made in heaven.

These Date "Snickers" are a great better-for-you candy swap for Halloween too.

Snickers dates on a white plate

What are Medjool dates?

There are many varieties of dates, but this recipe calls for Medjool dates. I prefer using Medjool dates because they tend to be larger and have a more firm yet juicy texture that's desirable here. I always like to pick up a few packs of Natural Delights Medjool Dates to stock in my kitchen and have at all times!

In October 2022, I was actually able to help harvest dates and see the full process they go through to reach our grocery shelves! Did you know Medjool dates grown on "date palms" that look like this? Each date palm tree produces around 200-250 pounds of dates - WOW!

Date palm tree
Date palm tree

How to pit dates

Pitting dates might seem like a tricky task, but it's actually a breeze! To pit dates for your "Snickers" Dates recipe, simply make a lengthwise slit down one side of the date using a knife, ensuring you don't cut through the other side. Gently remove the pit and voilà! You're ready to stuff them.

Alternatively, you can buy them pre-pitted.

Pitting dates
Pitting dates

Can you freeze dates?

Absolutely! You can freeze Medjool dates to extend their shelf life. Store them in the original pack or in an airtight bag in the freezer for up to 1 year.

On a daily basis, we generally store a handful of dates in the fridge for up to 6 months. This helps them retain their moisture better than leaving them at room temperature.

What are date snickers?

Date snickers create the same fantastic taste of the classic Snickers bar, but with a fraction of the ingredients and added sugars. This makes them a more nourishing candy swap. This recipe is perfect for a quick energy boost or a delightful dessert after a busy day. We love enjoying them as a Halloween dessert in place of regular Snickers.

This trend really took off on Tiktok and now the hashtag #datesnickers has over 13.5 million views. Once you try it, you won't be able to resist making it again and again!

Picking up a Dates “Snickers”

Are snickers dates healthy?

These Medjool date snickers offer a dose of natural sweetness from the dates, rather than added sugars. Medjool dates are also packed with essential vitamins and minerals like potassium and fiber. 

The peanuts and peanut butter adds healthy fats and protein to keep you satisfied, while the dark chocolate brings a boost of antioxidants.

What ingredients do you need?

  • Medjool Dates: These naturally sweet and chewy dates provide a rich caramel-like flavor. 
  • Creamy Peanut Butter: Look for a natural version without added sugars or preservatives. It should calls for just peanuts and salt on the nutrition label.
  • Peanuts: Finely chopped peanuts add a delightful crunch to each bite.
  • Chocolate: Choose your favorite chocolate chips to create the perfect coating.
  • Coconut Oil: This is helps in melting the chocolate smoothly and gives it a glossy finish.
Medjool date snickers

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair these "Snickers" Dates with a glass of almond milk or a cup of hot cocoa for a delightful treat.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: Over time the dates can become hard or start to crystallize from being in the fridge. No worries though - give them a quick refresh by microwaving with a damp paper towel for 5 seconds.
  • Scaling Tips: Double or triple the recipe for a party or holidays, and share the joy of these delectable treats with friends and family.

Customize these chocolate covered dates

Like all of my other recipes, this medjool date recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what chocolate you want to use to coat them

  • Chocolate of your choice - I like to use dark chocolate for an extra boost of beneficial antioxidants but you can also melt milk chocolate or white chocolate. If you are dairy-free, consider an allergy friendly dark chocolate or oat milk based chocolate. 
  • Nut Butter - Of course date snickers wouldn't be complete without peanuts and peanut butter. However, if you have a peanut allergy, feel free to swap for another nut such as chopped almonds and almond butter!
Date filled with peanuts

Can you make snicker dates ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prepare these "Snickers" Dates in advance and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week or freeze for 2 months. They're perfect for meal prepping or keeping in the freezer to pull out for a delicious gift for someone.

How do I store leftovers?

You can store any leftover chocolate covered dates in an airtight container for up to a week in the fridge or up to a month in the freezer. Just take them out a few minutes before enjoying to let them soften slightly.

Can you freeze dates on parchment paper

The perfect holiday dessert or halloween dessert

Add a touch of elegance to your holiday charcuterie boards with these easy chocolate covered dates. They also make the perfect effortless, last-minute dessert you can whip up in no time. For an extra dash of holiday spirit, consider swapping the flakey sea salt with a dash of festive red and green sprinkles!

Whether it's Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christmas, or Valentine's Day-these date snickers are an easy homemade treat. They're also a unique holiday treat to exchange besides your typical cookies. Check out these other edible gifts too!

Try these other Medjool date recipe too:

  • No Bake Cheesecake Bites
  • Chocolate Smoothie with 2 Medjool dates
  • Customizable Stuffed Dates
  • Salted Caramel Protein Bites
Snickers Date Recipe 4
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Date Snickers

These Date "Snickers" are a fun spin on a classic candy. This recipe calls for just 5 ingredients-Medjool dates, creamy peanut butter, crunchy peanuts, coconut oil, and melted chocolate of your choice.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Sweet Treat Choices
Keyword: chocolate covered dates, date snickers, holiday dessert, snickers date
Servings: 12 "snickers" dates
Calories: 145kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 12 Medjool dates
  • ¼ cup creamy peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoons peanuts, finely chopped
  • ½ cup chocolate chips of your choice (milk, dark, white chocolate)
  • 1 teaspoon coconut oil
  • Flakey sea salt, optional
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Use a knife to make a lengthwise slit down the center of one side of the dates. Be sure to not cut through the other side. Remove and discard the center pit.
  • Add pitted dates to a sheet of parchment paper on a sheet pan.
  • Spoon about 1 teaspoon of peanut butter into the center of each sliced date. Then, top each date with about ½ teaspoon chopped peanuts.
  • Next, place chocolate chips and coconut oil in a small bowl and microwave in 30-second intervals until fully melted. 
  • You can use a spoon to gently drizzle the melted chocolate over dates OR you can fully fully coat the dates in the chocolate by using your hands or a toothpick to dip them. Place the chocolate covered dates back onto the parchment paper.
  • If desired, sprinkle over a pinch of sea salt before adding the sheet pan to the freezer for 10-15 minutes.
  • Once the chocolate has hardened, you can enjoy your homemade date snickers!

Nutrition

Serving: 1date snickers | Calories: 145kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 81mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 20g

save this date snickers recipe on pinterest:

Save these date snickers on pinterest

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Protein-Packed Flaxseed Smoothie

October 14, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

Having a go-to smoothie is a must. That's why I love this Flaxseed Smoothie, filled with protein-packed ingredients like peanut butter, ground flaxseed, and Greek yogurt. This smoothie takes just minutes to make and provides you with sustained energy throughout the day!

A glass of flaxseed smoothie topped with banana slices and a peanut butter swirl.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • How do I make this flaxseed smoothie?
  • Is this flaxseed smoothie sweet?
  • Are flaxseeds healthy?
    • How much flaxseed should I put in a smoothie?
  • Which peanut butter should I choose?
  • What is the consistency of this smoothie?
  • Can you turn this into a flaxseed smoothie bowl? 
  • Customize with any add-ins of your choice
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
  • Try these other smoothies too:

This post was first published on January 14, 2022. It was updated on April 1, 2023. This post was first published on January 14, 2022. It was updated on October 14, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

Ingredients for a flaxseed smoothie—frozen bananas, peanut butter, yogurt, and milk—on a marble surface.

How do I make this flaxseed smoothie?

Follow these simple steps and you'll have a delicious and protein-packed smoothie ready in no time.

  1. Gather your ingredients. This recipe calls for a banana, ground flaxseed, peanut butter, add-ins of your choice (such as Greek yogurt), and milk.
  2. Add all ingredients to a blender. I tend to use a single serve bullet blender attachment. It makes it easy to blend and then drink right from the cup.
  3. Blend until smooth and creamy. It will be somewhat thick but feel free to add more or less milk to reach your desired consistency.

Is this flaxseed smoothie sweet?

In this smoothie, the banana works as the primary sweetener. That's why I recommend using an overripe and frozen banana, for a sweeter taste.

If you're looking for this smoothie to be a touch sweeter, feel free to add in a Medjool date as a natural sweetener. Dates also work great in salted caramel protein bites and banana bread to add sweetness without any added sugars.

Flaxseed smoothie ingredients like peanut butter, banana, and flaxseeds in a blender, ready to mix.
Creamy flaxseed smoothie blend in the blender, ready to be poured.

Are flaxseeds healthy?

Yes! Flaxseeds are a great source of dietary fiber, satiating protein, and heart-healthy fats. They also contain something called "lignans", which are beneficial plant compounds that can help protect against certain diseases.

I typically enjoy ground flaxseeds over whole flaxseeds for easier digestion. Try adding ground flaxseed to a variety of recipes like customizable granola, pancake bakes, and mug cakes.

How much flaxseed should I put in a smoothie?

I generally use about 2 tablespoons ground flaxseed for 1 smoothie. You can add more if you like, the texture may just become more gritty.

Close-up of a flaxseed smoothie with banana slices and flaxseeds on top.

Which peanut butter should I choose?

I am a peanut butter fanatic and eat it on the daily! Whether it's in my morning oatmeal, homemade hummus, or cereal bars- I love how versatile and affordable this ingredient is. 

When buying peanut butter, stick away from hydrogenated oils and added sugars as much as possible. I recommend turning over to the nutrition label and look for minimal ingredients. In fact, I recommend just 2 ingredients-peanuts and sometimes a small amount of salt.

As an example, I have a peanut butter made with hydrogenated oil and added sugar shown on the left compared to a natural peanut butter with only 2 ingredients and no added sugar shown on the right.

Flaxseed smoothie in a glass with banana and peanut butter, perfect for a healthy snack.

What is the consistency of this smoothie?

This flax protein shake is somewhat thick. If you like it much thinner, feel free to double the amount of milk. So instead of adding ½ cup of milk, use 1 cup of milk.

Pouring a thick, creamy protein smoothie into a glass.

Can you turn this into a flaxseed smoothie bowl? 

Smoothie bowls are a thicker smoothie that's transferred to a bowl and topped with ingredients. It's super easy to turn this smoothie into an flax smoothie bowl! Follow the same recipe, but use half the milk so instead of adding ½ cup of milk, use ¼ cup of milk for the smoothie bowl version. I like using my Ninja Smoothie Bowl Maker (pictured below) to get the job done!

Blending ingredients
Smoothie blended until creamy
Flaxseed smoothie bowl

The best part about a smoothie bowl is adding over toppings. Try topping with more ground flax seed, sliced strawberries, and quinoa crunch granola. Try these 20+ other healthy smoothie bowl recipes too.

Customize with any add-ins of your choice

Like all my other recipes, this flaxseed protein shake is completely customizable. I typically like to add about 4 tablespoons of plain Greek yogurt to my smoothie but you can also swap this for another protein-packed ingredient like collagen peptides, protein powder, rolled oats, or chia seeds

A flaxseed smoothie in a glass with banana and peanut butter, next to smoothie ingredients.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Flaxseed Smoothie 7
Print Recipe
4.38 from 32 votes

Protein-Packed Flaxseed Smoothie

This Flaxseed Protein Shake is filled with the perfect mixture of protein-packed ingredients like peanut butter, ground flaxseeds, and greek yogurt. Customize it to your liking with ingredients of your choice.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drink Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: flax, Flaxseed Protein Shake, flaxseeds, morning shake, protein, smoothie
Servings: 1 - 16 oz smoothie
Calories: 445kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 large ripe banana, sliced and frozen (about 1 cup)*
  • 2 tablespoons ground flaxseed
  • 2 tablespoons creamy peanut butter or peanut powder
  • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt (or any yogurt of your choice)
  • ½ cup milk of your choice (cow's milk, almond, soy, oat, rice, coconut, cashew, hemp, flax, macadamia milk, etc.)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Add all ingredients to a blender and blend on high until smooth.
  • Serve immediately or store in the fridge for up to 24 hours.

Video

Notes

Banana Note: If you don't have a frozen banana, use can use a fresh banana and blend in ½ cup of ice to the smoothie to make it cold.
Greek Yogurt Note: If you're not a fan of Greek yogurt or are vegan, feel free to use a plant-based alternative. You could also omit the yogurt all together and replace it for about 2 tablespoons of another protein add-in of your choice such as collagen peptides powder, protein powder, rolled oats, chia seeds, hemp seeds, etc.
Smoothie Bowl Note: It’s super easy to turn this into an flax smoothie bowl! Follow the same recipe, but use half the milk so instead of adding ½ cup of milk, use ¼ cup of milk for the smoothie bowl version. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1smoothie | Calories: 445kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 70mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 26g | Calcium: 260mg | Iron: 1.7mg
This flaxseed smoothie is perfect to make for a healthy breakfast - dietitian approved!

Try these other smoothies too:

  • Apple Banana Smoothie
  • Strawberry Kale Smoothie
  • Blueberry Spinach Smoothie
  • Cherry Chocolate Cauliflower Smoothie
  • 20+ other healthy smoothie bowl recipes!

Protein Mug Cake

October 14, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 47 Comments

This protein mug cake is just the sweet treat you've been looking for. This recipe calls for 6 simple ingredients and is ready to eat in just one minute! Plus, it packs in 15 grams of protein-making it the perfect post workout snack, satisfying breakfast, or healthy dessert. 

Lifting up spoonful of fluffy protein powder mug cake

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Is this protein powder mug cake healthy?
  • What ingredients do I need to make this recipe?
  • What protein powder should I use?
  • How to make a protein mug cake
    • 1. First, stir together all the ingredients in a large mug.
    • 2. Then, microwave your mug for one minute.
    • 3. Finally, drizzle over extra peanut butter and chocolate chips.
  • Is this protein powder mug cake recipe vegan? 
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this protein mug cake recipe on pinterest:
  • Looking for more mug cake recipes? Check out my other favorites:

This post was first published on March 4, 2021. It was updated on October 14, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

Is this protein powder mug cake healthy?

As a dietitian, I can confidently say this protein mug cake is a nutritious option to have for a sweet treat. Depending on the protein powder you use, each serving packs in 15+ grams of protein. Protein is important for muscle repair and staying full longer. Research even suggests that higher-protein snacks can help curb hunger and support weight management by increasing feelings of fullness.

Peanut butter adds healthy fats that keep you feeling satisfied while also helping to balance blood sugar.

Lastly, this recipe is low in added sugars, especially if you use dark chocolate chips, which are rich in antioxidants to help benefit heart health. Whether you're having this protein mug cake for breakfast, dessert, or as a post-workout treat-this mug cake offers a balanced, nourishing way to satisfy your sweet tooth!

Peanut butter and chocolate chip close up

What ingredients do I need to make this recipe?

Gather just 6 simple ingredients for this protein powder mug cake. Chances are you already have them lying around your pantry!

  1. Banana naturally sweetens our mug cake. It's important to choose a ripe banana (the more brown, the better!) because the riper the banana is the sweeter it will be.
  2. Protein powder provides the bulk of the protein. If you want a vanilla protein mug cake, use vanilla protein powder. For more of a double chocolate feel, use chocolate protein powder. If you are using an unflavored protein powder, you may want to add a spoonful of maple syrup for sweetness. Protein powder also makes a great addition to energy bites and morning protein coffee.
  3. Peanut butter makes this mug cake extra creamy and delicious.
  4. Milk helps the dry ingredients break down into a batter-like consistency.
  5. Chocolate chips add a burst of sweet flavor.
  6. Baking powder helps give our mug cake it's extra fluffy, cake-like texture.
Protein powder scoop
Protein powder spilled onto backdrop

What protein powder should I use?

Go with a protein powder that fits your taste and what you're looking for! Whey protein is great if you like a creamier texture, while plant-based options like pea or hemp keep it dairy-free. When it comes to the flavor: we like vanilla for a classic, cozy flavor, but feel free to go with chocolate if that's your thing!

Ingredients for a protein mug cake, including a banana, protein powder, chocolate chips, peanut butter, and milk, arranged on a marble surface. A simple guide to making a protein cake in a mug.

How to make a protein mug cake

Say hello to the easiest cake-like sweet treat you'll ever make. Here's how to whip up this 1 minute mug treat.

1. First, stir together all the ingredients in a large mug.

The large mug helps make sure it doesn't spill over the sides when you cook it. I also like to spray the mug with cooking spray before adding the ingredients to prevent sticking, but you don't have to.

Ingredient in mug
Mixed together

2. Then, microwave your mug for one minute.

After the 60 seconds is complete, check to make sure it's cooked through and has a cakey texture. If it's still liquidy, microwave for another 15 seconds.

Chocolate chips on top of protein mug cake batter
Microwave mug cake in 1 minute

3. Finally, drizzle over extra peanut butter and chocolate chips.

Or use any other toppings you like. This mug cake would also be great with a scoop of ice cream, a sprinkle of toasted coconut flakes, or a drizzle of maple syrup for extra sweetness. 

Chocolate chips starting to melt
Freshly baked chocolate protein microwave cake in a white mug, with gold spoon lifting it up

Troubleshooting tips

When stirring together all the ingredients before microwaving, you should reach a pancake batter-like consistency. However, depending on the protein powder used, this can vary.

  • Too dry? If your batter is somewhat dry or overly thick. Stir in 1 tablespoon of milk to thin out the batter.
  • Too wet? On the other hand, if you find it too wet or liquidy, stir a bit more protein powder to thicken it up.
Close-up of a protein powder mug cake with chocolate chips in a white ceramic mug. Learn how to make this fluffy and satisfying chocolate protein mug cake with simple ingredients.
Close up of peanut butter drizzle on mug cake

Is this protein powder mug cake recipe vegan? 

The recipe as written is naturally gluten-free and vegetarian. This mug cake caters to other dietary preferences as well.

  • Vegan: Make this recipe vegan by using a pea or soy based protein powder. They also have vegan-friendly protein powders that contain a blend of various plant based proteins. You could also replace the protein powder for almond flour or oat flour which turns out just as delicious!
  • Dairy-free: To make a dairy-free mug cake, use non-dairy milk.
  • Nut-free: Peanut allergy or nut-free? No problem. Simply replace the peanut butter with another nut or seed butter. I love using 88 Acres Seed Butters.
  • Sugar-free: This recipe is already low in added sugar but if you want it completely added sugar-free, use stevia sweetened chocolate chips like Lily's Dark Chocolate Chips.
Chocolate chip mug cake

Is this protein mug cake healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe packs in 15 grams of protein and 7 grams of fiber. This balance of nutrients provides long-lasting energy and helps you feel more satisfied. This mug treat is low in added sugars and is naturally sweetened from ripe banana. Feel free to enjoy this protein powder mug cake for breakfast or dessert. 

You can also make this recipe ahead of time by mixing up all ingredients in your mug and then microwaving later on when you want it.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Close-up of a protein powder mug cake topped with chocolate chips and peanut butter, served in a white mug on a marble countertop.
Protein Mug Cake 13
Print Recipe
4.50 from 270 votes

Protein Mug Cake

This protein mug cake is just the sweet treat you've been looking for. It packs in 15 grams of protein-making it the perfect post workout snack, satisfying breakfast, or healthy dessert.
Prep Time1 minute min
Cook Time1 minute min
Total Time2 minutes mins
Course: Sweet Treat Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: 1 minute meal, breakfast, dessert, healthy, mug cake, protein powder
Servings: 1 mug cake
Calories: 260kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Large Coffee Mug (A 16-ounce mug is ideal)

Ingredients

  • Cooking spray
  • ½ small ripe banana, mashed
  • 2 tablespoons (about 15 grams) protein powder of your choice (vanilla or chocolate protein powder typically works best)
  • 1 tablespoon peanut butter, plus more for topping
  • 1 tablespoon mini dark chocolate chips, plus more for topping
  • ⅛ teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon milk of your choice (almond milk, soy milk, dairy milk, oat milk) - only use if needed
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Spray a large 16-ounce mug* with cooking spray.
  • Add banana to mug and mash with a fork until mostly broken down. 
  • Add in protein powder, peanut butter, chocolate chips, and baking powder and stir until fully combined.
  • At this point, you should reach a batter-like consistency. However, depending on the protein powder used, it may still be somewhat thick and dry looking. If this is the case, stir in the 1 tablespoon of milk to thin into a batter. On the other hand, if you find it too wet, add a bit more protein powder.
  • Microwave mug cake for 60-90 seconds. Then, let cool for 30 seconds. Batter should be mostly dry to the touch and have a cakey texture. 
  • Enjoy with additional peanut butter and chocolate chips on top, if desired.

Video

Notes

*You want to use an extra large mug because the cake will puff up in the microwave when it cooks. Using a large mug prevents it from spilling over the sides.
Don't have protein powder? Use 2 tablespoons of almond flour or oat flour instead!

Nutrition

Serving: 1mug cake | Calories: 260kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 100mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 10g

save this protein mug cake recipe on pinterest:

A drizzle of peanut butter on a freshly baked chocolate protein mug cake. An easy microwave protein cake recipe that's perfect for a protein-rich snack or dessert.

Looking for more mug cake recipes? Check out my other favorites:

  • Flaxseed Mug Cake
  • Healthy Pumpkin Mug Cake
  • Gingerbread Mug Cake
  • Vanilla Protein Mug Cake
  • Oreo Protein Mug Cake

Customizable Savory Oats Recipe (Steel Cut Oats)

September 30, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

If you're craving a cozy, nourishing breakfast that breaks away from the usual sweet oats, this savory oats recipe template is for you. With a base of creamy steel-cut oats simmered in broth, this recipe gives you the perfect canvas to make it your own. Customize it with ingredients like savory protein, vibrant veggies, or other favorite toppings.

Savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, and pine nuts in white bowl with spoon next to bowl.
Savory oats with sunny side up egg, greens, avocado, and almonds in white bowl with spoon next to bowl.
Savory oats with sausage links, mushrooms, and sunflower seeds in white bowl with spoon next to bowl.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love these savory oats
  • Why is it healthy?
  • Can I use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats?
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make it
  • Savory oats combos we love
    • Combo #1: Eggs
    • Combo #2: Bacon
    • Combo #3: Sausage
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make these savory oats ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this savory oats recipe template on pinterest:
  • try these recipes too:
Savory oats recipe template: serves 4 variation with spoon in savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, micro greens, and pine nuts in white bowl

Why you'll love these savory oats

  • Versatile and customizable: This recipe is a blank canvas. Whether you're a vegetarian, vegan, or a meat-lover, it's easy to adapt to whatever you're craving.
  • Nutrient-packed: Steel-cut oats aren't just filling-they're loaded with fiber and protein, giving you a nourishing head start to your day. Throw in your favorite veggies and toppings for an added nutrient boost that'll keep you going strong.
  • Comforting and savory: If you're tired of sweet oatmeal, this savory version is a total game changer. It's creamy, cheesy, and bursting with umami, it's everything you didn't know you were missing in your morning routine..
Savory oats with sausage links, mushrooms, and sunflower seeds in white bowl.
Savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, micro greens, and pine nuts in white bowl.
Savory oats with sunny side up egg, greens, avocado, and almonds in white bowl.

Why is it healthy?

Steel-cut oats are a whole grain superstar, packed with fiber and essential nutrients like iron, magnesium, and B vitamins. Their slow digestion keeps you feeling full longer while helping to stabilize blood sugar levels-perfect for sustained energy. 

Pouring uncooked steel cut oats into vegetable broth on the burner.
Three dishes of plain savory oats in white bowls. Scoop is being taken out of one.

The veggies and nuts take this dish to the next level! They add extra fiber, vitamins, and healthy fats, turning it into a balanced, feel-good meal that keeps you full and energized all day long. Plus, research shows that increasing fiber intake can help lower LDL (bad) cholesterol, which supports heart health by reducing the risk of cardiovascular disease.

Savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, micro greens, and pine nuts in white bowl
Savory oats with sunny side up egg, greens, avocado, and almonds in white bowl.
Savory oats with sausage links, mushrooms, and sunflower seeds.

Can I use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats?

Yes! If you want to use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats, simply up 2 cups of rolled oats and 4 cups of water or broth.

Butchers Bone Broth 4

Ingredients you'll need

  • Steel-cut oats - The heart and soul of the dish. These oats are wonderfully chewy and heartier than rolled oats, giving your bowl a satisfying texture.
  • Broth or water - I personally adore cooking the oats in bone broth for extra flavor as well as a boost of protein and collagen. One of my favorites is Butcher's Chicken Bone Broth with 13 grams of protein per cup.
  • Garlic - Freshly minced garlic brings a savory punch that wakes up the flavors in every bite.
  • Parmesan cheese - A sprinkle of parm adds creamy, salty goodness that complements the oats beautifully. 
  • Truffle oil - This luxurious ingredient takes the flavor up a notch. If you don't have truffle oil on hand, no problem. Simply substitute with regular oil, butter, or ghee.
  • Nuts or seeds - Add some crunch with your favorite nuts or seeds. Slivered almonds, pine nuts, or pumpkin seeds are all great options.
Ingredients to make savory oats: vegetable broth, minced garlic, dry oats, parmesan cheese, truffle oil, and nuts,
3 white bowls, one with sliced almonds, one with sunflower seeds, and one with pinenuts.

How to make it

  1. Cook the oats: In a medium pot, bring 4 cups of vegetable broth or water to a boil. Stir in 1 cup of steel-cut oats, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the oats simmer uncovered, stirring occasionally, for about 25-30 minutes, until they're tender but still have that satisfying chew.
  2. Season the oats: Once the oats are perfectly cooked, turn off the heat. Stir in 2 minced garlic cloves, a pinch of salt, black pepper, half of the grated Parmesan cheese, and 1 tablespoon of truffle oil. This is where the magic happens, as the flavors meld together beautifully. 
  3. Toast the nuts/seeds: In a separate small skillet, toast 2 tablespoons of your chosen nuts or seeds over medium heat until golden brown and fragrant-about 3-5 minutes. This adds a delicious crunch that really takes the dish to the next level.
  4. Assemble the bowls: Spoon the seasoned oats into 4 bowls or meal prep containers. Finish by topping with the remaining Parmesan cheese and your toasted nuts or seeds. Enjoy your creation immediately or save it for a nourishing meal later!
Vegetable broth on burner.
Vegetable broth boiling.
Vegetable broth with oats cooking on burner.
Cooked oats in pan on burner.
Seasonings on cooked oats in pan on the burner.
Mixing seasoning into cooked oats on burner.
Almonds toasting in skillet on burner.

Savory oats combos we love

Here's a few of our favorite flavor combos to inspire your next savory oats creation. 

Combo #1: Eggs

  • For the nuts or seeds, we used sliced almonds.
  • For the protein, add a fried egg, scrambled egg, or however you prefer to cook it. 
  • For the veggies, add a good amount of sauteed kale.
  • For the toppings, add creamy, diced avocado.
Savory Oats 28

Combo #2: Bacon

  • For the nuts or seeds, we used pine nuts.
  • For the protein, add some crispy bacon.
  • For the veggies, add chopped cherry tomatoes.
  • For the toppings, add nutritious microgreens.
Person holding spoon in savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, micro greens, and pine nuts in white bowl.

Combo #3: Sausage

  • For the nuts or seeds, we used pumpkin seeds.
  • For the protein, add any of your favorite cooked sausage.
  • For the veggies, add caramelized mushrooms - here's a guide to making them.
  • For the toppings, add chili crunch. If you're sensitive to spicy things, you can swap the chili crunch for crispy flavorful shallots instead.
Person holding spoon in savory oats with sausage links, mushrooms, and sunflower seeds in white bowl.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: For a well-rounded meal, pair this savory oats dish with a fresh green salad or a cup of fruit on the side. Having this with a hot cup of coffee or tea makes for the ultimate cozy morning.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If you find the oats soaking up all the liquid before they're fully cooked, simply add a splash more broth or water until they reach your desired texture.
  • Scaling Tips: Got a crowd to feed? This recipe is a breeze to double or triple. Just grab a bigger pot, adjust the ingredients, and you're good to go!
Savory oats with sausage links, mushrooms, and sunflower seeds in white bowl with spoon in bowl.
Savory oats with sunny side up egg, greens, avocado, and almonds in storage container.
Spoon in savory oats with tomatoes, bacon, micro greens, and pine nuts in white bowl with spoon in bowl.

Customize it your way

Just like my other recipes, this savory oats dish is completely customizable. You're in the driver's seat when it comes to picking additional ingredients.  

  • Protein of your choice: Boost the protein by adding a fried egg, crispy prosciutto, or grilled chicken slices for extra protein.
  • Veggies of your choice: Stir in some caramelized mushrooms, roasted asparagus, or sautéed kale for added flavor and nutrients.
  • Toppings of your choice: Finish things off with diced avocado, chopped chives, or a drizzle of balsamic glaze for an extra burst of flavor.
White plate with a sunny side up egg, three sausage lines, and two slices of bacon.
3 white bowls, one with kale, one with sliced tomatoes, and the other with sliced mushrooms.
3 white bowls, one with micro greens, one with avocado, and one with chili crisps.

Can I make these savory oats ahead of time?

Absolutely! This savory oats recipe is perfect for meal prep. Simply cook the oats as instructed, then let them cool completely before storing in airtight containers. They'll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days, ready to reheat whenever you need a quick, nourishing meal.

Then, you can easily mix and match toppings throughout the week too! Who said meal prep had to be boring, right?!

Food storage container with savory oats, kale, almonds, and sunny side up egg.

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. When you're ready to reheat, simply warm them up in the microwave or on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or water if needed to loosen up the oats. 

We haven't experimented with freezing these oats yet, but they should last for up to 3 months in an airtight container in the freezer. Once thawed, you may just need to add a splash of water or broth to rehydrate them.

Close up of microgreens

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Savory Oats 15
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Savory Oats Recipe Template (Steel Cut Oats)

With a base of creamy steel-cut oats simmered in flavorful vegetable broth, this recipe gives you the perfect canvas to make it your own. Customize it with ingredients like savory protein, vibrant veggies, or other favorite toppings.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 250kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 cup steel-cut oats
  • 4 cups broth or water (We personally love using Butcher's Bone Broth for extra protein + collagen!)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced (about 2 teaspoons)
  • Salt and freshly cracked black pepper to taste
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon truffle oil (can also sub for regular oil, butter, or ghee)
  • 2 tablespoons nuts or seeds of your choice (slivered almonds, pine nuts, walnuts, pistachios, pumpkin seeds, or sunflower seeds)
  • Optional: Protein of your choice (fried or poached egg, crispy prosciutto, bacon bits, grilled chicken slices, crispy air fried tofu, Beyond breakfast sausage patty, etc.)
  • Optional: Veggie toppings of your choice (caramelized mushrooms, roasted asparagus spears, caramelized onions, sauteed kale, roasted red peppers, chopped cherry tomatoes, steamed broccoli, grilled zucchini, etc.)
  • Optional: Toppings of your choice (diced avocado, chopped chives, chopped basil leaves, balsamic glaze drizzle, red chili flakes, chili crunch, microgreens, truffle salt, pickled red onions, etc.)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • In a medium pot, bring the water or broth to a boil. Stir in the steel-cut oats, then reduce the heat to medium low. Simmer uncovered, stirring occasionally, for about 25-30 minutes until the oats are tender but still have a slight chew. If the oats absorb all the liquid before they're fully cooked, add a bit more broth or water.
  • Once the oats are cooked, turn off the heat. Then, stir in the minced garlic, salt, black pepper, half of the grated Parmesan cheese, and the truffle oil.
  • In a separate small skillet, toast the nuts or seeds over medium heat until golden brown and fragrant, about 3-5 minutes.
  • Spoon the steel-cut oats into 4 bowls or meal prep containers. Top evenly with the remaining Parmesan cheese and toasted nuts or seeds.
  • NOW… this is where it gets fun! Feel free to customize with any additional protein, veggies, or toppings of your choice before serving. I don't have specific amounts because you can measure and add with your heart for this part!

Notes

Savory Oats Combos We Love:
  • Fried egg + sauteed kale + diced avocado + toasted sliced almonds
  • Bacon + chopped tomatoes + microgreens + toasted pine nuts
  • Sausage + caramelized mushrooms + chili crunch + pumpkin seeds
 
Rolled Oats Note: If you want to use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats, simply up 2 cups of rolled oats and 4 cups of water or broth.
 
Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for the base oats made with water, parmesan, pumpkin seeds, and truffle oil. This calculation does not include protein, veggies, or toppings. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 230mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 4g | Calcium: 130mg | Iron: 2.1mg

save this savory oats recipe template on pinterest:

Meal prep savory oats guide

try these recipes too:

  • Customizable Meal Prep Breakfast Burritos
  • Cottage Cheese Scrambled Eggs
  • Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich

Smoothie Template — Build a Customizable Smoothie

September 25, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

Kickstart your day with a smoothie that's as healthy as it is delicious! This customizable recipe is your ultimate smoothie template, allowing you to mix and match with your favorite fruits, vegetables, and other healthy ingredients. Including 10+ flavor combos to inspire your next smoothie creation.

Pink, green, and yellow smoothies next to each other.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How to make a healthy smoothie
    • Choose your base 
    • Add vegetables 
    • Add yogurt 
    • Pour in the liquid
    • Include your add-ins
    • Sweeten to taste
    • Blend until smooth
  • Smoothie combos we love
    • Flavor #1: Vanilla Green Matcha
    • Flavor #2: Tropical Smoothie
    • Flavor #3: Dragon Berry Boost
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize this smoothie template your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this smoothie template on pinterest:
  • try these healthy smoothie recipes too:

Why you'll love it

  • Quick and easy: In less than 10 minutes, you can blend up a delicious smoothie with just a few ingredients and a blender. 
  • Fully customizable: Whether you're craving something fruity, creamy, or with a veggie twist, you can tailor this smoothie to your taste.
  • Nutrient-packed: Bursting with vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, this smoothie is a powerhouse way to kick off your day with a healthy start.
Birds eye view of pink, green, and yellow smoothies.

Is a smoothie healthy?

Absolutely! Smoothies are an easy and delicious way to enjoy a nutrient-packed meal in minutes. By including a mix of fruits, vegetables, protein sources like yogurt or protein powder, and healthy add-ins like seeds or nut butters, you're creating a balanced meal that fuels you with sustained energy. Plus, research shows that regularly enjoying smoothies can increase your intake of fruits and veggies-leading to a host of health benefits. 

What ingredients do you need?

  • Frozen fruit: Frozen fruit adds a creamy texture and helps keep your smoothie cold without the need for ice. Anything from bananas and berries to mango and pineapple works beautifully.
  • Vegetables: Sneak in some extra nutrients with veggies like spinach, kale, or even cauliflower rice. These blend in seamlessly, giving your smoothie a hidden health boost. 
  • Yogurt: Greek yogurt or plant-based yogurt adds creaminess and a protein punch, making your smoothie more satisfying.
  • Liquid: Almond milk, soy milk, or even coconut water are great options for blending. Choose your favorite to control the flavor and consistency.
  • Add-ins: Supercharge your smoothie with extras like chia seeds, flaxseeds, or a scoop of protein powder for an added nutritional boost. 
  • Sweetener: If your fruits are a bit tart, a pitted Medjool date or even a drizzle of honey can sweeten things up perfectly. With sweet fruits you may not even need any sweetener! 
Smoothie Template — Build a Customizable Smoothie Ingredients: spinach, yogurt, banana, frozen strawberries, hemp seeds, protein powder, matcha, and milk.

How to make a healthy smoothie

Choose your base 

Start with 1 cup of your favorite frozen fruit. If you don't have frozen fruit ready to go, you could always use fresh fruit too. Just add ice at the end to make it cold and thick.

Frozen fruits like strawberries, mango. pineapple, banana, and dragonfruit in white bowls.

Add vegetables 

If you're adding in veggies, toss in about ½ cup to the blender. If not, be sure to enjoy them in other ways such as air fryer green beans or these snackable mini stuffed peppers.

Add yogurt 

Add ½ cup of your preferred yogurt for creaminess and protein. We prefer using Greek yogurt for the most protein, but you could also opt for regular yogurt. If you're dairy-free or vegan, you can easily sub a plant-based yogurt too.

Pour in the liquid

Add ½ cup of your chosen liquid to help everything blend smoothly. Most of the time we use milk, but some smoothies are best with liquids like juice or coconut water. If you want to make a smoothie bowl instead, use about 2-4 tablespoons of liquid instead of the ½ cup. Here's 20 of my favorite healthy smoothie bowl recipes!

Include your add-ins

Boost your smoothie with 1-2 tablespoons of add-ins like seeds, nut butters, or protein powder. If using mix-ins such as spices like cinnamon, you may want to start with a smaller amount like ½ teaspoon. Feel free to add a variety of mix-ins too!

Add in's like cocoa, flaxseed, hemp seed, chia seed, and matcha in white bowls.

Sweeten to taste

If needed, add a touch of sweetener of your choice. 

Blend until smooth

Blend everything on high for about 30 seconds, until everything is smooth and creamy. Then, pour into a glass and enjoy your delicious, personalized smoothie!

Ingredients in blender with milk being poured in.
Ingredients being blended up in blender.
Finished bright green smoothie fully blended.

Smoothie combos we love

Here's a few of our favorite flavor combos to inspire your next smoothie creation. We have even more at the bottom of the recipe card too!

Flavor #1: Vanilla Green Matcha

A delightful combo of ½ cup banana slices, ½ cup strawberry slices, ½ cup spinach, ½ cup vanilla Greek yogurt, ½ cup almond milk, 1 scoop vanilla protein powder, 1 tablespoon hemp seed, 1 tablespoon matcha powder, and 4 drops vanilla stevia.  

Birds eye view of green smoothie with banana slices on top.

Flavor #2: Tropical Smoothie

This sweet earthy blend combines 1 cup mango, ½ cup pineapple, ½ cup coconut yogurt, ½ cup coconut water, 2 tablespoons coconut flakes, and 1 scoop vanilla protein powder. 

Birds eye view of yellow smoothie with coconut flakes and a pineapple slice on top.

Flavor #3: Dragon Berry Boost

This refreshing blend calls for ½ cup mixed berries, ½ cup dragonfruit, ½ cup Greek yogurt, ½ cup almond milk, 1 tablespoon hemp seeds, 1 tablespoon peanut butter, and 1 teaspoon honey.  

Smoothies 18

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving tips: For a more filling meal, pair your smoothie with a handful of nuts or a slice of whole-grain toast.
  • Troubleshooting tips: If your smoothie is too thick, add a bit more liquid. If it's too thin, add more frozen fruit or a few ice cubes.
  • Scaling tips: This recipe is easily doubled or tripled. Just increase the ingredients proportionally and make sure your blender can handle the larger volume!

Customize this smoothie template your way

Like all of my other recipes, this smoothie template is completely customizable. You get to choose what fruits, vegetables, and other ingredients you want to use:

  • Fruit options: Banana, berries, mango, peach, apple, pineapple, kiwi-the possibilities are endless.
  • Vegetable options: Spinach, kale, beets, cauliflower rice, cooked sweet potatoes-add whatever veggies you prefer.
  • Yogurt options: Greek yogurt, plant-based yogurt, or even flavored varieties for an extra flavor boost.
  • Liquid options: Almond milk, soy milk, dairy milk, or even fruit juice-select your preferred base for blending.
  • Add-ins: Hemp seeds, chia seeds, nut butters, or spices like cinnamon-enhance your smoothie's flavor and nutrition. If you're a fan of ground flaxseed, check out our flax protein smoothie recipe!
Hand holding bright pink smoothie with a strawberry slice on rim.

Can I make it ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prep your smoothie ingredients in advance. Simply measure out the frozen fruit, vegetables and store them in a freezer-safe bag. In the morning, simply add the rest of your ingredients before blending. Bonus points for measuring out the other ingredients too. By doing this prep work, you'll have a smoothie ready-to-go for your busy morning. 

How do I store leftovers?

Store any leftover smoothie in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Before drinking, give it a good shake or stir. For longer storage, freeze the smoothie in an ice cube tray and blend it with a little extra liquid when ready to enjoy.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

A pink, green, and yellow smoothie.
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Smoothie Template - Build a Customizable Smoothie

This customizable recipe is your ultimate smoothie template, allowing you to mix and match with your favorite fruits, vegetables, and other healthy ingredients. Including 10+ flavor combos to inspire your next smoothie creation.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1 serving
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Blender

Ingredients

  • 1 cup chopped frozen fruit of your choice (banana, berries, mango, peach, apple, pineapple, kiwi, or a mixture, etc.)
  • Optional: ½ cup chopped vegetables of your choice (spinach, kale, cauliflower rice, cooked sweet potatoes, zucchini, cooked carrots, cucumber, cooked beets, avocado etc.)
  • ½ cup yogurt of your choice (greek yogurt, plant-based yogurt, regular yogurt, flavored yogurt, etc. You can use a vegan-friendly option too if desired)
  • ½ cup liquid of your choice (almond milk, soy milk, dairy milk, oat milk, coconut water, orange juice, apple juice, etc.)
  • 1-2 tablespoons add-ins of your choice (hemp seeds, chia seeds, flaxseeds, cocoa powder, matcha powder, beet powder, collagen powder, honey, maple syrup, peanut butter, cashew butter, spices like cinnamon, etc.)
  • Optional: 1 scoop protein powder of your choice (vanilla, chocolate, strawberry, etc. You can use a vegan-friendly option too if desired)
  • Optional: Sweetener of your choice (1 pitted Medjool date, 1 teaspoon honey, 1 teaspoon maple syrup, or couple drops of liquid stevia)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Add everything to a blender and blend on high until smooth, about 30 seconds. Transfer to a glass and enjoy.
  • See the notes below for flavor combo inspiration!

Notes

Flavor Combos We Love:
  • Vanilla Green Matcha: ½ cup banana slices, ½ cup strawberry slices, ½ cup spinach, ½ cup vanilla Greek yogurt, ½ cup almond milk, 1 scoop vanilla protein powder, 1 tablespoon hemp seed, 1 tablespoon matcha powder, 4 drops vanilla stevia.
  • Tropical Smoothie: 1 cup mango, ½ cup pineapple, ½ cup coconut yogurt, ½ cup coconut water, 2 tablespoons coconut flakes, 1 scoop vanilla protein powder.
  • Dragon Berry Boost: ½ cup mixed berries, ½ cup dragonfruit, ½ cup Greek yogurt, ½ cup almond milk, 1 tablespoon hemp seeds, 1 tablespoon peanut butter, 1 teaspoon honey.
  • Chocolate Peanut Butter Power: 1 cup banana slices, ½ cup cauliflower rice, ½ cup Greek yogurt, ½ cup dairy or almond milk, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, 1 tablespoon peanut butter, 1 scoop chocolate protein powder, 1 Medjool date.
  • Peaches & Cream Delight: 1 cup peaches (fresh or frozen), ½ cup vanilla yogurt, 4 ounces cottage cheese, 1 cup soy milk, 1 tablespoon honey.
  • Spiced Carrot Cake Smoothie: 1 cup banana slices, ½ cup cooked carrot, ½ cup vanilla yogurt, 1 cup almond milk, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 1 tablespoon maple syrup.
  • PB&J Time: ½ cup banana slices, ½ cup strawberry slices, ½ cup cooked sweet potatoes, ½ cup yogurt, 1 cup almond milk, 2 tablespoons peanut butter.
  • Berry Beet Smoothie: 1 cup frozen mixed berries (strawberries, blueberries, raspberries), ½ cup cooked beets, ½ cup Greek yogurt, 1 cup almond milk, 1-2 tablespoons flax seeds, 1 scoop chocolate protein powder, 1 teaspoon honey.
  • Apple Cinnamon Smoothie: 1 cup frozen apple slices, ½ cup cooked sweet potatoes, ½ cup Greek yogurt, 1 cup oat milk, 1-2 tablespoons chia seeds, 1 scoop vanilla protein powder, 1 teaspoon honey, dash of cinnamon.
  • Blueberry Cauliflower Smoothie: 1 cup frozen blueberries, ½ cup cauliflower rice, ½ cup regular yogurt, 1 cup almond milk, 1-2 tablespoons cocoa powder, 1 scoop chocolate protein powder, 1 teaspoon honey.
  • Kiwi Sweet Potato Smoothie: 1 cup frozen kiwi, ½ cup cooked sweet potatoes, ½ cup plant-based yogurt, 1 cup coconut water, 1-2 tablespoons chia seeds, 1 scoop vanilla protein powder, 1 teaspoon maple syrup.

save this smoothie template on pinterest:

Customizable smoothie template to save on Pinterest

try these healthy smoothie recipes too:

  • Chocolate Smoothie
  • Protein Packed Flaxseed Smoothie
  • 20+ Delicious Smoothie Bowl Recipes

Customizable Pumpkin Energy Bites

August 22, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

These seasonal pumpkin energy bites are the perfect snack for fall-or any season, really. They're customizable, healthy, and take just 5 minutes to make! Plus, you get to use any add-ins of your choice like chocolate chips, coconut, or dried fruit. See the video below to see how easy it is to whip up these pumpkin energy bites!

Seasonal pumpkin energy bites with chocolate chips

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Are these energy bites healthy?
  • Ingredients you'll need
    • Where do I buy pumpkin? 
    • What else can I make with pumpkin purée?
  • How to make pumpkin energy bites
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make these pumpkin energy bites ahead of time?
  • How do I store energy balls?
  • Need more hands-on help with recipes?
    • save this pumpkin energy balls recipe on pinterest:
  • Looking for other no-bake snacks? Try these:

This post was first published on October 15, 2021. It was updated on August 22, 2024.

Why you'll love it

If you're anything like me, pumpkin season is something you look forward to every year. From pumpkin coffee to pumpkin protein shakes, there's no shortage of this versatile squash. But these pumpkin energy bites stand out for several reasons:

  • Quick and Easy: Just stir, chill, and roll. No baking required! 
  • Healthy and Nourishing: Packed with fiber from oats and protein from nut butter, these bites offer sustained energy. Don't underestimate the power of a healthy snack!

Customizable: Tailor the recipe to your taste with a variety of add-ins like chocolate chips, chia seeds, or dried cranberries.

Are these energy bites healthy?

Absolutely! Here's why:

  • Oats provide a good source of fiber, which helps keep you full longer.
  • Pumpkin is rich in vitamins A and C, boosting your immune system.
  • Nut Butter adds healthy fats and protein, balancing the carbohydrates in the oats for sustained energy.

Ingredients you'll need

To make these pumpkin energy bites, you'll need:

  • Rolled Oats - These provide the chewy base of the bites, packed with fiber. You can use either rolled oats or quick cooking oats. Just be sure to not use steel cut oats-they're too tough.
  • Pumpkin Purée - Look for it in the baking aisle, usually near the bottom shelf. Be sure to grab 100% pumpkin rather than canned pumpkin pie mix.
  • Nut Butter - Peanut butter, almond butter, or another favorite works great, offering healthy fats and protein.
  • Maple Syrup or Honey - Adds natural sweetness to the bites.
  • Pumpkin Pie Spice or Cinnamon - This gives the bites their signature fall flavor.
  • Add-ins of Your Choice - Choose from coconut flakes, ground flaxseed, dried cranberries, chocolate chips, chia seeds, or nuts. Mix and match for your perfect bite!
Pumpkin

Where do I buy pumpkin? 

You can actually make your own homemade pumpkin puree. But if you're lazy like me, you can buy pumpkin purée in the baking aisle of your local grocery store as well. It's usually on the bottom of the shelf.

What else can I make with pumpkin purée?

This pumpkin energy balls recipe calls for ½ cup pumpkin puree. If you are using a standard 15 ounce can of pumpkin, that means you will have a little over 1 cup leftover after making these bites.

You'll want to store any leftover puree in the fridge and use within 5-7 days. The good news is there's tons of ways to use up extras. Here is some leftover pumpkin puree recipe inspiration:

  • Coconut Cream Pumpkin Overnight Oats
  • Vegan Pumpkin and Carrot Soup
  • Maple Butter Pumpkin Hummus
  • Pumpkin Breakfast Cookies
Close up of rolled oats, chocolate chips, and pumpkin

How to make pumpkin energy bites

Making these energy bites is as easy as 1-2-3:

  1. Mix and Chill: Combine all the ingredients in a large bowl. Place the mixture in the freezer for about 20 minutes to firm up. You can skip the chilling part, but they will be more sticky and harder to roll.
  2. Roll: Once chilled, use your hands to roll the mixture into 1-inch balls.
  3. Store: Place the bites in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to a week or freeze for up to 3 months.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: These bites are perfect on their own, but you can pair them with a warm cup of tea or coffee for an extra cozy snack.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If the mixture is too sticky to roll, try chilling it a bit longer or adding a bit more oats.
  • Scaling Tips: You can easily double or triple this recipe. Just make sure to adjust the chilling time if you increase the batch size.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these pumpkin energy bites are completely customizable. This recipe calls for 1 cup of add-ins of your choice. That means you can add in whatever you like or whatever ingredients you have on hand. Some ideas include:

  • coconut flakes
  • ground flaxseed
  • rice krispies
  • dried cranberries
  • raisins
  • chocolate chips
  • chia seeds
  • pumpkin seeds
  • nuts like pecans, walnuts, or pistachios

Try playing around with a combination for the one cup. For example, I usually do a mixture of ¼ cup coconut, ¼ cup ground flaxseed, ¼ cup chocolate chips, and ¼ cup chia seeds.

Pumpkin energy balls on a white plate with pumpkin in background

Can I make these pumpkin energy bites ahead of time?

Yes, these bites are perfect for meal prep. You can make them ahead of time and store them in the fridge or freezer, so you always have a healthy snack on hand.

How do I store energy balls?

Store these bites in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 7 days. If you want to keep them longer, they can be frozen for up to 3 months. Just take out a few at a time to thaw in the fridge as needed. Try making these peanut butter energy bites or coconut matcha balls too!

Need more hands-on help with recipes?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about this virtual program with a dietitian.

Pumpkin energy balls on a white plate
Pumpkin Energy Bites 1 scaled
Print Recipe
4.34 from 15 votes

Pumpkin Energy Bites

These seasonal pumpkin energy bites are a perfect snack to make for a busy week or holiday party. They are customizable and take 5 minutes or less to make!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Snack Choices
Keyword: energy bites, fall, healthy, pumpkin, snacks
Servings: 12 large bites
Calories: 170kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 cup rolled oats
  • ½ cup pumpkin puree
  • ½ cup nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, pumpkin seed butter, sesame tahini, walnut butter, hazelnut butter, etc.)
  • 1 cup add-ins of your choice (coconut flakes, ground flax seed, dried cranberries or raisins, chocolate chips, chia seeds, chopped nuts)
  • 3 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 tablespoon pumpkin pie spice or cinnamon
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Stir all ingredients together in a bowl and mix until combined. Let mixture chill in the freezer for 20 minutes.
  • After chilled, roll mixture into 1 inch balls using hands.
  • Store the bites in an airtight container in the refrigerator up to one week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 1bite | Calories: 170kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 10mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 9g

save this pumpkin energy balls recipe on pinterest:

These seasonal pumpkin energy bites are a perfect snack to make for a busy week or holiday party. They are customizable and take 5 minutes or less to make! #vegan #glutenfree #energybites #pumpkinrecipes #healthysnack #CheerfulChoices

Looking for other no-bake snacks? Try these:

  • Protein Powder Mug Cake
  • Edible Cookie Dough made with dates
  • Salted Caramel Energy Bites
  • Hummus Veggie Pinwheels

Holiday Christmas Rice “Wreath”

August 15, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This Holiday Christmas Rice Wreath recipe is the perfect side to bring some festive flair to your holiday table. It contains fluffy rice as the base, topped with colorful "ornaments" like roasted sweet potatoes, pistachios, pomegranate seeds, and cilantro. Plus, you get to customize it with your choice of sauce on top.

Festive rice wreath with sweet potatoes, pistachios, and pomegranate seeds.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make this christmas rice
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make this christmas rice ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this festive christmas side dish recipe on pinterest:
  • try these holiday recipes too:

Why you'll love it

You all know, I love a good studded rice recipe. Exhibit A: My T-Swift inspired "Bejeweled" Rice! This recipe is the perfect combo of sweet and savory. Here's why you'll come back to it year after year.

  • Festive Presentation: With its vibrant colors and festive design, this rice wreath is a showstopper at any Thanksgiving, Christmas, or holiday gathering.
  • Quick and Easy: Despite its impressive appearance, this dish comes together in just 30 minutes, making it perfect for the busy holiday season.
  • Nutritious and Delicious: Packed with nutrient-rich ingredients like sweet potatoes, pistachios, and pomegranate seeds, this dish offers both flavor and health benefits.
Christmas rice with sweet potatoes, pistachios, and pomegranate seeds.

Why is this christmas side dish healthy?

This recipe is packed with wholesome ingredients that are both tasty and nutritious. Rice always gets a bad rep for some reason, but in reality it's filled with over 15 vitamins and minerals like B vitamins, iron, and zinc.

Sweet potatoes, known for their high fiber content, are also rich in vitamins A and C, helping support immune function and overall health. 

Pistachios are loaded with healthy fats, protein, and fiber, contributing to heart health and satiety.

Finally, pomegranate seeds bring a burst of antioxidants, particularly vitamin C, which is essential for skin health and immune defense for the cold winter months .

So all in all, this holiday christmas rice side dish is definitely a healthy one to make!

Wreath shaped holiday recipe

Ingredients you'll need

  • Rice: I try to buy U.S.-grown varieties when possible such as Lundberg Family Farms or 4Sisters. You can also look for a "Grown in the USA" logo on the package.
  • Roasted Sweet Potatoes: I like to save time by buying frozen roasted sweet potatoes like these ones. Otherwise you can make your own by dicing and roasting sweet potatoes until tender and slightly caramelized.
  • Pistachios: Go for roasted and salted or light salted varieties. We like to buy pre-shelled pistachios to save time. 
  • Pomegranate Seeds: You can buy whole pomegranates and get the seeds out yourself. Otherwise, you can buy ready-to-go pomegranates seeds (also called arils) in the refrigerated produce section.
  • Chopped Cilantro: This adds bright, earthy flavor. Substitute with parsley if cilantro isn't your thing.
  • Sauces: This dish isn't complete without a bit of creamy sauce. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses for tanginess, tahini for creaminess, or infused olive oil or melted butter for luscious flavor.

How to make this christmas rice

  1. Cook the Rice: Start by bringing 6 cups of water or broth to a boil in a large pot. Add 3 cups of rice, reduce the heat, cover, and simmer for 15-20 minutes, or until the rice is fluffy.
  2. Form the Wreath: Spread the cooked rice in a large dip serving platter, shaping it into the wreath.
  3. Top the Wreath: Evenly distribute the roasted sweet potato cubes, followed by the pistachios, pomegranate seeds, and a sprinkle of chopped cilantro around the rice wreath.
  4. Add the Sauce: Drizzle your choice of sauce on top and serve!
Cooking rice
Spoonful of white rice

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair this christmas rice wreath with a holiday protein like roasted turkey or glazed ham. A fresh salad or roasted broccoli on the side would also be a great way to add some greens.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If your rice turns out too sticky, try fluffing it with a fork and letting it sit uncovered for a few minutes to release excess moisture.
  • Scaling Tips: This recipe feeds a crowd, but if you're hoping to make a smaller amount, simply divide the ingredients in half.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this Holiday Christmas Rice Wreath is completely customizable. You get to choose what rice and finishing sauce you want to use:

  • Rice of your choice: While Jasmine rice provides a fragrant and fluffy base, you can easily substitute it with other varieties like Basmati for a more nutty flavor. If you use brown rice, you'll need to cook it for closer to 40-50 minutes. Although we haven't tested it, you could probably even sub white rice for cauliflower rice or quinoa.
  • Sauce of your choice: The finishing sauce can be tailored to your taste preferences as well. Pomegranate molasses adds a bit of tangy sweetness and more festive color. For a creamier texture, tahini sauce brings a rich, nutty flavor. If you prefer a lighter option, an olive oil or butter infused with herbs like rosemary or thyme for a subtle, aromatic finish.

You could also switch up the nuts in this recipe and use slivered almonds or pecans if you prefer. Also, if cilantro isn't your thing, omit it or try fresh parsley instead.

Rice in wreath shape
Roasted sweet potatoes

Can I make this christmas rice ahead of time?

Yes, you can! Cook the rice and roast the sweet potatoes ahead of time. Store them separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Reheat the rice then assemble the wreath just before serving to ensure the freshest taste and best presentation.

How do I store leftovers?

Although this dish is best enjoyed right away, you can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in the microwave, adding a splash of water or broth to rehydrate the rice if needed.

Holding into holiday rice
Spoonful of rice with pistachios on top

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Rice Wreath 7
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Holiday Christmas Rice "Wreath"

This Holiday Christmas Rice Wreath recipe is the perfect side to bring some festive flair to your holiday table. Topped with colorful "ornaments" like roasted sweet potatoes, pistachios, pomegranate seeds, and cilantro. Plus, you get to customize it with your choice of sauce on top.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 360kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Chip and Dip Serving Dish

Ingredients

  • 2 cups frozen roasted sweet potatoes
  • 3 cups long grain white rice of your choice (You can pick up a regular bag of long grain white rice or a specific variety like Jasmine, Basmati, or Texmati)
  • 6 cups water or broth
  • ¼ cup shelled pistachios
  • ½ cup pomegranate seeds
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh cilantro
  • ¼ cup sauce of your choice (pomegranate molasses, tahini sauce, infused olive oil, or melted ghee/butter)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Cook sweet potatoes in the oven according to the package instructions.
  • Cook the rice by bringing water or broth to a boil in a large pot. Add rice, reduce heat to a low simmer, and cover.
  • Let simmer for about 15-20 minutes or according to the package cook time - and don't lift the lid to check on it or it will release all the steam.
  • Once the rice is fully and fully cooked, remove from the heat and fluff it with a fork.
  • Spread the cooked rice evenly into a circular chip dip dish to form the wreath shape.
  • Top the rice wreath with roasted sweet potato cubes, sprinkling them evenly around the wreath. Follow with pistachios, pomegranate seeds, and a sprinkle of chopped cilantro. This gives the wreath its "ornaments"!
  • Drizzle with your choice of sauce before serving. We like to put extra sauce in the center of the chip dip dish in case people might want to spoon over more!

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 360kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g

save this festive christmas side dish recipe on pinterest:

Holiday rice side dish recipe

try these holiday recipes too:

  • Sheet Pan Greens Beans & Sausage
  • Air Fryer Corn Fritters
  • Goat Cheese Caprese Dip

Customizable Stuffed Mini Peppers

August 13, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This stuffed mini peppers recipe is perfect for parties, snack time, or meal prep. It's crunchy and creamy all in one bite! Plus, you get to customize these pepper boats with any fillings of your choice like hummus, cream cheese, or guacamole!

Colorful stuffed mini peppers filled with various toppings on a platter.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make customizable stuffed mini peppers
    • Our favorite mini stuffed pepper combos
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this stuffed mini peppers recipe on pinterest:
  • try these bell pepper recipes too:

Why you'll love it

These stuffed mini peppers are a breeze to make and bring a vibrant pop of color to any table. Whether you're hosting a get-together or simply need a quick snack, these little bites are perfect. Here's why you'll love them:

  • Customizable: With different filling and spices options, this recipe suits any palate or dietary preference.
  • Healthy and fresh: Stuffed mini bell peppers are packed with vitamins, and the fillings can range from protein-rich hummus to healthy fats like guacamole.
  • Perfect for parties: These stuffed mini sweet peppers are easy to handle and make for the perfect finger food.
  • No baking involved: This recipe is as easy as fill and serve. There's no baking needed for them.

Are these stuffed peppers healthy?

Absolutely! Mini bell peppers are a fantastic low-calorie snack packed with vitamins C and A, which are essential for immune health and skin care. Depending on your choice of filling, you can also boost the nutritional content with healthy fats, protein, or fiber. For instance, hummus adds plant-based protein, while guacamole provides heart-healthy fats. 

Close-up of stuffed mini peppers with hummus, guacamole, and cream cheese fillings

Ingredients you'll need

Here's a breakdown of the main ingredients:

  • Mini bell peppers: These colorful beauties are best when firm and bright. Look for a mix of red, orange, and yellow peppers for more color. In the photos and video, you'll see I use Nature Fresh Farms Sweet S'NAPS™. These peppers are greenhouse grown and SO crunchy.
  • Filling of your choice: Choose from options like hummus, whipped cream cheese, or guac. Each brings a unique flavor and texture to the table.
  • Spices or toppings: Spices like smoked paprika, red pepper flakes, or everything bagel seasoning can add that final touch of flavor. Experiment with different combinations to find your favorite.
Scooping out seeds
Variety of stuffed mini peppers with hummus, guacamole, and cream cheese fillings

How to make customizable stuffed mini peppers

Here's how to bring these delightful bites to life:

  1. Prep the peppers: Start by washing the mini bell peppers thoroughly and patting them dry. Slice each pepper in half lengthwise, and remove the seeds and membranes to create little "boats."
  2. Fill the peppers: Spoon your chosen filling into each pepper half. You can mix and match fillings for variety or stick to a single favorite.
  3. Top with spices: Sprinkle your selected spices or toppings over the filled pepper boats. This step adds flavor and visual appeal.
  4. Serve and enjoy: Arrange your stuffed peppers on a platter, and they're ready to serve!

Our favorite mini stuffed pepper combos

Here are the combos shown in the pictures.

  1. Hummus + smoked paprika
  2. Guac + red pepper flakes
  3. Whipped cream cheese +  bagel seasoning

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving tips: These stuffed mini peppers are great on their own, but you can also serve them with a side of whole-grain crackers or a light salad. For drinks, consider pairing with a refreshing iced tea or a glass of crisp white wine.
  • Troubleshooting tips: I won't lie, getting the peppers prepped takes a bit of time. If you can have a friend or family member help you out, this will save on time.
  • Scaling tips: Planning for a larger crowd? This recipe is easy to double or triple. Simply multiply the ingredients, and you're good to go.
Vibrant stuffed mini sweet peppers topped with spices

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these stuffed mini peppers are completely customizable. You get to choose what fillings and spices you want to use:

  • Fillings of your choice: You can choose any favorite hummus, whipped cream cheese, or guac. Feel free to make your own homemade or stick with a ready-to-go store bought brand.
  • Spices of your choice: Smoked paprika, red pepper flakes, and bagel seasoning are some of our go-to spices. However, feel free to use any you like best. 

Can I make it ahead of time?

Yes, you can! Prepare the peppers and fillings up to a day in advance and store them separately in airtight containers. When you're ready to serve, simply fill the peppers and add your toppings. This makes them perfect for meal prep or party planning.

Close up of colorful stuffed mini peppers for snacking

How do I store leftovers?

Store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. Unfortunately, these don't freeze well, as the peppers tend to lose their crunch. 

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Sweet Snaps Pepper Boats 1
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Customizable Stuffed Mini Peppers

These stuffed peppers are is perfect for parties or snack time. Customize with any fillings of your choice like hummus, cream cheese, or guac!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Servings: 16 pepper boats
Calories: 110kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 8 assorted mini bell peppers of your choice (red, orange, or yellow)
  • 1 cup filling of your choice (hummus, whipped cream cheese, guacamole)
  • 1 tablespoon spices of your choice (smoked paprika, red pepper flakes, bagel seasoning, etc.)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Wash the mini bell peppers and pat them dry. Slice each pepper in half lengthwise, removing the seeds and membranes to create boats.
  • Fill each pepper half with your chosen filling (about 1 tablespoon per pepper half).
  • Sprinkle your chosen spices over the filled boats and serve.

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Notes

Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for hummus and red pepper flakes. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 2pepper halves | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 50mg | Potassium: 370mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g

save this stuffed mini peppers recipe on pinterest:

Mini stuffed peppers boats - Save on Pinterest

try these bell pepper recipes too:

  • One Pot Stuffed Pepper Skillet
  • Jalapeno Popper Peppers

Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream (Ninja Creami Recipe)

August 12, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 3 Comments

Looking for a high protein ice cream you can create without an ice cream maker? This Ninja Creami Strawberry Cheesecake Ice Cream is perfect for satisfying your sweet tooth with minimal effort. Made with a lower fat base and minimal added sugars, it's a healthier alternative to store-bought ice cream. Plus, you can customize it with any protein powder of your choice.

Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 6

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! I was gifted the Ninja Creami shown in this recipe post. See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love this protein ice cream recipe
  • Why I use the Ninja Creami
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make Ninja Creami Ice Cream
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • How to store Ninja Creami ice cream
  • Can you respin Ninja Creami leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this Ninja Creami recipe on pinterest:
  • try these other summer dessert recipes too:

Why you'll love this protein ice cream recipe

I will say, the Ninja Creami is really the star of this recipe. If you don't have this appliance, you won't be able to make this recipe. However, head over to my other Strawberry Cheesecake 'Nice' Cream post that's super easy to whip up!

If you do have a Creami, or plan to get one soon-here's why you'll adore this recipe:

  • Simple to Make: With just a few ingredients and the help of the Ninja Creami, you can whip up this Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream with ease.
  • Healthier Alternative: This recipe uses sugar-free cheesecake pudding mix and light cream cheese, making it a lower-calorie option compared to traditional ice cream.
  • Protein-Packed: The addition of protein powder makes it a satisfying treat that can help keep you fuller longer.
Creami

Is it healthy?

This Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream is a healthier take on traditional ice cream. By using sugar-free pudding mix, light cream cheese, and protein powder, we're reducing the sugar content while adding in satiating protein. Research shows protein can help with our weight by promoting feelings of fullness.

Why I use the Ninja Creami

As a dietitian, I'm always looking for simple ways to create healthier versions of treats. The Ninja Creami has been a game changer for making homemade ice cream this summer.

Traditional ice cream relies on high-fat cream for its texture, but with the Ninja Creami, you can achieve that same creaminess using lower-fat ingredients like whole milk and light cream cheese. You can even make ice cream with dairy-free milks like almond milk or soy milk.

Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 7

Ingredients you'll need

This Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream only calls for a few simple ingredients.

  • Whole Milk: The base of your ice cream, providing a creamy texture. I haven't tested this one with a plant-based milk, but I'm sure it would work great!
  • Cheesecake Instant Pudding Mix: Adds that classic cheesecake flavor. Feel free to use sugar-free or if you prefer the regular one, that works too.
  • Protein Powder: Choose your favorite flavor (vanilla, strawberry cheesecake, etc.) to add a nutritional boost. One of my favorites to use is Clean Simple Eats Strawberry Cheesecake protein powder.
  • Strawberry Jam: My favorite to use with no added sugars is GOOD GOOD.
  • Light Cream Cheese: Adds richness and creaminess with fewer calories than full-fat versions. If you want to use full-fat though, you totally can.
  • Fresh Strawberries: For that burst of fresh summer flavor and added texture.
  • Crushed Graham Crackers: Mimics the classic cheesecake crust and adds a bit of crunch.
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 1
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 2

How to make Ninja Creami Ice Cream

  1. Mix Ingredients: Add all the ingredients (except strawberries and graham crackers) to your Ninja Creami and blend with a milk frother until smooth.
  2. Freeze: Pour the mixture into the Ninja Creami container and freeze for 24 hours.
  3. Process: After freezing, process the mixture using the 'Light Ice Cream' function on your Ninja Creami.
  4. Add Mix-Ins: Mix in a tablespoon of milk, diced strawberries, and crushed graham crackers, then process again with the 'Mix In' function.
  5. Enjoy: Scoop and serve immediately for the best texture! It will start to melt pretty quickly since we use a milk base.
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 3
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 4
Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 5

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: This Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream pairs wonderfully with a drizzle of strawberry syrup or a dollop of whipped cream. Serve it in a waffle cone for added crunch.
  • Troubleshooting: I will say, the Ninja Creami is very loud. Make sure to spin it during a time where you're being considerate to neighbors or those working from home.
  • Scaling Tips: Want to make more? Simply make two pints of it. Just make sure you have enough space in your freezer first!

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder you want to use.

  • Protein Powder of Your Choice: Whether you opt for whey, plant-based, or casein protein, you can tailor it to your dietary needs and taste preferences. One of my favorites to use is Clean Simple Eats Strawberry Cheesecake protein powder.
Creami recipe

How to store Ninja Creami ice cream

You can make the strawberry cheesecake base (before spinning in the Creami) ahead of time and freeze it for up to 2 to 3 months. However, for the best texture and flavor, you should probably enjoy your ice cream within the first month.

Can you respin Ninja Creami leftovers?

This recipe either makes 1 very large serving or 2 medium size servings. If you don't eat the whole pint of protein ice cream in one sitting, you can re-freeze it and then re-spin it in the Ninja Creami another time. It may start to get freezer burnt over time though, so try to enjoy it within 1 month.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream 6
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Strawberry Cheesecake Protein Ice Cream (Ninja Creami Recipe)

This Ninja Creami Strawberry Cheesecake Ice Cream is perfect for satisfying your sweet tooth with minimal effort. Made with a lower fat base and minimal added sugars, it's a healthier alternative to store-bought ice cream. Plus, you can customize it with any protein powder of your choice.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Freezing Time1 day d
Course: Sweet Treat Choices
Servings: 2 servings
Calories: 500kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Ninja CREAMi

Ingredients

  • 1 cup whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons sugar-free cheesecake instant pudding mix
  • 2 tablespoons protein powder of your choice vanilla, strawberry cheesecake, etc.
  • 2 tablespoons no added sugar strawberry jam
  • 2 tablespoons light cream cheese softened (microwave for 10 seconds to soften)
  • 1 tablespoon whole milk additional
  • ½ cup diced fresh strawberries plus more for topping
  • ½ cup crushed graham crackers plus more for topping
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • In a Ninja Creami, combine 1 cup of whole milk, cheesecake pudding mix, protein powder, strawberry jam, and softened cream cheese. Mix thoroughly using a milk frother until well blended.
  • Transfer the mixture to the Ninja Creami pint and freeze for 24 hours.
  • After freezing, insert the pint into the Ninja Creami and process using the 'Light Ice Cream' function.
  • Remove and add 1 tablespoon of milk, strawberries, and graham crackers to the pint and process again with the 'Mix In' function to incorporate everything.
  • Serve immediately and enjoy with more strawberries and graham crackers on top if desired.

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Notes

Note on Leftovers: This recipe either makes 1 very large serving or 2 medium size servings. If you don't eat the whole pint in one sitting, you can re-freeze it and then re-spin it in the Ninja Creami another time. It may start to get freezer burnt over time though, so try to enjoy it within 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 2servings | Calories: 500kcal | Carbohydrates: 65g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 29g | Calcium: 430mg | Iron: 2.1mg

save this Ninja Creami recipe on pinterest:

Ninja Creami recipe

try these other summer dessert recipes too:

  • Strawberry Cheesecake Ice Cream (No Creami Needed)
  • No Bake Cheesecake Bites

Hummus Veggie Pinwheels

August 5, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

These colorful Hummus Veggie Pinwheels are perfect to prep for a busy work week or as a healthy back-to-school snack. Packed with fresh, vibrant veggies, these pinwheels are not just tasty-they're incredibly quick to make too. Plus, you get to customize with your favorite veggies, leafy greens, and hummus.

Colorful veggie pinwheels on wood serving board

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make pinwheels
    • 1. Prepare the tortillas
    • 2. Add the lettuce
    • 3. Layer the veggies
    • 4. Roll and slice
    • 5. Store in the fridge
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make veggie pinwheels ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this colorful veggie pinwheels recipe on pinterest:
  • Try these other meal prep friendly snacks too:

Why you'll love it

These delish pinwheel bites are not only nutritious-but also super easy to make. Perfect for meal prep, picnics,  a quick lunch on the go, or a satisfying snack, here's why you'll love them: 

  • Customizable: Tailor these pinwheels to your taste with your favorite veggies and hummus of your choice.
  • Healthy: Packed with an array of vitamins and fiber from fresh vegetables, plus some plant-based protein and fats from your choice of hummus. 
  • Convenient: These pinwheels are an ideal make-ahead snack for busy days or spontaneous snacking.
Stack of pinwheels on white plate
NFF Pinwheels 12

Is it healthy?

Absolutely! Here's why these colorful veggie pinwheels are a healthy choice: 

  • Whole Wheat Tortillas: Packed with fiber and complex carbohydrates from whole grains, these tortillas can help provide sustained energy and support digestive health.
  • Hummus: Hummus provides a boost of plant-based protein and fiber. Plus, research shows how the fiber in hummus can help support a healthy gut.
  • Fresh Veggies: The vibrant mix of veggies is loaded with essential vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. These nutrients help support a strong immune system, healthy skin, and overall well-being.
All the ingredients prepped and in white bowls
NFF Pinwheels 2

Ingredients you'll need

To whip up these tasty pinwheels, all you need is 4 ingredients.

  • Whole Wheat: These serve as a nutritious and hearty base for your wraps, providing fiber and whole grains. 
  • Hummus: This chickpea spreads add a burst of flavor and moisture.. 
  • Romaine or Leafy Greens: Crispy greens add a delightful crunch and help keep the wraps from becoming soggy. 
  • Veggies of Your Choice: Go with bell peppers, cucumbers, carrots, tomatoes, cabbage, or any favorites. Just be sure to pat them dry to avoid making the wraps soggy. I love using greenhouse grown veggies from Nature Fresh Farms (#nutritionpartner) that have next level flavorful & CRUNCH.

How to make pinwheels

Follow these easy steps to create your colorful veggie pinwheels.

1. Prepare the tortillas

Lay out your tortillas and spread a thin layer of hummus over each one (about 2 tablespoons per wrap). This will add flavor and moisture to your pinwheels.

Hummus being spread onto whole wheat tortilla

2. Add the lettuce

Place a crisp, dried romaine leaf on top of the spread. Press it down gently to ensure it sticks. 

Large piece of romaine lettuce on top of hummus and tortilla

3. Layer the veggies

Arrange your sliced veggies in neat horizontal rows evenly across the lettuce leaf.. Be creative with your colors and textures!

Sliced peppers, carrots, cucumbers, and cabbage arranged on lettuce

4. Roll and slice

Roll each tortilla tightly from one end to the other, going in the direction of the horizontal rows of veggies.Slice into 1-inch pinwheels for easy, bite-sized snacks. 

Rolling up the pinwheel
Slicing the pinwheel
Final colorful veggie pinwheels laid out on wooden serving board

5. Store in the fridge

Keep your pinwheels fresh by storing them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Perfect for a quick, grab-and-go snack or lunch!

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: If you're hoping to add a bit more protein, feel free to add thin sliced cheese or deli meat on top before rolling. Turkey pinwheels would be delicious here!
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If you're finding that your tortillas are cracking, try warming them up for 10 seconds before spreading the hummus. This will make them more pliable and easier to roll.
  • Scaling Tips: Got a crowd to feed? No problem! Just double or triple the recipe for a larger gathering. Simply increase the ingredients proportionally.
NFF Pinwheels 15

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these Veggie Pinwheels are all about making them your own. Here's how you can customize them to fit your taste:

  • Leafy green of your choice: Add some variety by using spinach, kale, or arugula for a peppery kick. Or stick with crisp romaine for a classic crunch.
  • Hummus of your choice: Mix things up with different flavors of hummus, like roasted red pepper or everything bagel seasoning. If you're not a hummus fan, try using guacamole. Guacamole adds heart-healthy monounsaturated fats that support heart health and help to reduce inflammation.
  • Veggies of your choice: Get creative with your veggie choices! Try adding shredded beets for a vibrant color, thinly sliced radishes for a bit of crunch, or even roasted veggies for a unique flavor twist.!
Veggies of your choice
NFF Pinwheels 4

Can I make veggie pinwheels ahead of time?

Absolutely! These pinwheels are perfect for meal prep and back-to-school lunches. Just roll and slice them, then store in the fridge. They'll stay fresh and delicious for about 3 days. This makes them a nice option for a busy week when you need a healthy snack ready to go.

Colorful veggie pinwheels in meal prep container with strawberries
NFF Pinwheels 29

How do I store leftovers?

To keep your pinwheels fresh, store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. These pinwheels don't freeze well so they're best eaten fresh. 

Cutting board with hummus pinwheels on top

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Veggie Pinwheels 12
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Colorful Hummus Veggie Pinwheels

These Colorful Veggie Pinwheels are perfect to prep for a busy work week or as a healthy back-to-school snack, Plus, you get to customize with your favorite veggies, leafy greens, and hummus.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Course: meal prep
Cuisine: American
Servings: 30 wraps (~4 per tortilla)
Calories: 175kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 6 - 8-inch whole wheat tortillas*
  • 1 cup hummus of your choice (classic, everything bagel, pine nut, roasted red pepper, southwest, garlic, caramelized onion, etc.)
  • 6 large leaves of leafy greens of your choice, washed and completely dried (I typically use a large romaine leaf but you could also use kale, spinach leaves, or chard. It's important for the leaves to be dried so it doesn't get the tortillas soggy)
  • 6 cups veggies of your choice, sliced into matchsticks (bell peppers, cucumbers, carrots, tomatoes, cabbage, etc. Try to pat the veggies dry with a paper towel before adding so the wrap doesn't get soggy - especially watery veggies like cucumber)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Lay out tortillas and spread a thin layer of hummus over each one (about 2 tablespoons per wrap).
  • Place dried lettuce leaf or leafy green on top of the hummus. Press the lettuce or leafy green down to flatten if needed.
  • Arrange the sliced veggies evenly across the lettuce leaf in horizontal rows.
  • Roll each wrap tightly towards the horizontal rows of veggies then slice into 1-inch pinwheels.
  • Store pinwheels in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Notes

*Tortilla Note: I typically use whole wheat tortillas for an extra nutrition boost. However, you could also use another type of 8-inch tortilla such as spinach tortillas, tomato basil tortillas, or another favorite flavor or yours!

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 175kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 400mg | Potassium: 370mg | Fiber: 20g | Sugar: 5g | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 2.1mg

save this colorful veggie pinwheels recipe on pinterest:

Meal prep pinwheels

Try these other meal prep friendly snacks too:

  • Veggie Bites
  • Bliss Balls
  • Customizable Meal Prep Breakfast Burritos

Individual Charcuterie Cups

July 29, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 1 Comment

These individual Charcuterie Cups are seriously the most impressive appetizer for any gathering. DIY them for last-minute parties, Mother's Day, Christmas, or laid-back game nights with friends. I even made these individual cups for both my bridal shower and wedding this summer! Plus, you get to customize with your favorite nuts, cheeses, meats, fruits, and crackers. They get a bite of sweetness with Natural Delights Mini Medjools date rolls too! 

DIY Charcuterie cups made for wedding and bridal showers

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Natural Delights Medjool Dates. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • What is a charcuterie cup?
  • Is charcuterie healthy?
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make DIY charcuterie cups
  • Print these into cute stickers
    • [Click here to download the free sticker sheet PDF]
    • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Perfect for holidays and parties
  • Perfect for Valentine's Day too!
  • Customize it your way
  • Could I add veggies to this charcuterie cup?
  • Can I make these individual charcuterie cups ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this individual charcuterie cups recipe on pinterest:
  • try these other charcuterie recipes too:

What is a charcuterie cup?

A charcuterie cup is like a mini charcuterie board served in an individual cup. They've gained popularity over the past few years. You can also make these into "charcuterie boats" served in a boat shaped tray. 

Why you'll love it

If you love sweet + savory, you're in for a treat. These mini charcuterie cups bring together sweet, savory, crunchy, and creamy flavors in every cup. Here's why they're always a hit:

  • Perfect Portion: With charcuterie in a cup, it's already broken out into individual portions. This makes them easy to serve and enjoy without the mess of a traditional charcuterie board. You can even prep them ahead of time.
  • Customizable: Easily swap out ingredients to fit your dietary preferences or whatever you have on hand.
  • Visually Appealing: With vibrant colors from the fruits and elegant garnishes, these cups are not just appetizers - they're a feast for the eyes. We guarantee they'll wow your guests! 
Numerous charcuterie on a white backdrop
Overhead shot of berries, cheese, and dates

Is charcuterie healthy?

Charcuterie often gets a bad rap, but it can definitely be healthy! Here's how each element brings balance to these cups:

  • Nuts: Mixed nuts like almonds, cashews, and pecans offer a powerhouse of healthy fats, protein, and fiber helping keep you satisfied.
  • Cheese: Did you know some cheeses have probiotics? These are ones that have been aged but not heated such as swiss, provolone, and cheddar. Studies have actually shown that cheese is effective at maintaining and delivering viable probiotics to the human intestine. There's even some notable health benefits from eating probiotic cheese like reduced GI infections, lower cholesterol levels, and improvements in inflammatory bowel disease (IBD). Of course, don't rely on cheese alone. Be sure to vary your diet with other probiotic food sources too!
  • Meats: Meats like salami and turkey offer a source of protein and essential vitamins, minerals such as B12 and niacin. You'll even find some brands with "reduced sodium" if you want to lower your salt intake.
  • Fruits: Fruits like grapes and berries add a burst of antioxidants, vitamins, and natural sweetness.
  • Natural Delights Mini Medjools:  These bite-sized Natural Delights Mini Medjools are filled with simple ingredients like almonds, dried cranberries, and Medjool dates. They provide energizing carbohydrates and satiating fiber. Plus, you can enjoy 4 of these mini medjools for just 150 calories with zero added sugars. Click here to find Mini Medjools near you!
Ingredients for charcuterie cups placed into brown cups

Ingredients you'll need

To create these delicious cups, here's the ingredient you'll wanna round up:

  • Mixed Nuts: Choose from almonds, cashews, pecans, pistachios, or walnuts. You could even do a mixture.
  • Cheese: You can either cut into cubes from a block or buy pre-cubed.
  • Meat Slices: Choose your favorite type of sliced meat such as salami, prosciutto or turkey slices for a leaner option.
  • Fruit: Offers a pop of color and phytonutrients.
  • Natural Delights Mini Medjools: These date rolls come in 3 delicious flavors including Coconut, Cacao Pecan, and Sweet & Salty Almond. Feel free to pick up your favorite flavor or mix and match!
  • Crackers: We recommend a whole grain version for a boost of fiber. Opt for varieties like multigrain or seed crackers for added crunch and nutritional benefits.
  • Fresh Herbs: Herbs top off these charcuterie cups with an elegant presentation and delicious aroma. Add these right before serving so they don't wilt.
Ingredients for charcuterie cups laid out
Three variations of mini medjool dates

How to make DIY charcuterie cups

Creating individual charcuterie cups is easy and fun. They're also perfect for getting kiddos involved in the kitchen and letting them choose their favorite elements!

  1. Prepare the Cups: Place a layer of nuts at the bottom of each cup, about 2 tablespoons per cup. This helps to weigh down the charcuterie cups and adds a crunchy base.
  2. Prepare the Skewers: Thread a toothpick or small skewer with all the elements, including Natural Delights Mini Medjools.
  3. Fill the Cups: Insert the prepared skewers into the cups so they're upright.
  4. Add the Crackers: Right before you're ready to serve, add 2-3 crackers around the skewer. This keeps the crackers from getting soggy and ensures they are crisp and fresh for your guests.
  5. Garnish with Herbs: Finally, garnish each cup with a few sprigs of fresh herbs like rosemary or thyme. This really gives them a presentation pop!
  6. Add Stickers: For a special touch, you can personalize each cup with custom stickers ordered through Canva or Etsy. I did this for my bridal shower!
Six individual charcuterie cups with nuts at bottom
A variety of skewers with different ingredients laying on pan
Six individual charcuterie cups with skewers of ingredients

Print these into cute stickers

Want to add an extra layer of charm to your individual charcuterie cups? You can print adorable themed stickers to label or decorate your cups! These are perfect for parties, bridal showers, picnics, or just to impress your guests with a personal touch. I created a downloadable PDF digital file with two of these sticker designs.

All you need to do is download the PDF (linked below), print it on 8.5x11" sticker paper, then cut out and stick onto your cups or packaging. It's an easy, crafty way to take your charcuterie presentation to the next level.

[Click here to download the free sticker sheet PDF]

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Try pairing these charcuterie cups with a crisp white wine or a light rosé. They also go great with sparkling water infused with fresh fruits.
  • Creating Shapes: You can use a festive shaped cookie cutter (like a heart or Christmas tree) to cut the cheese into fun shapes. For my bridal shower cups, I used a small heart-shaped cookie cutter.
  • Scaling Tips: This recipe makes about 8 individual charcuterie cups, but feel free to double or triple the recipe if you need more! Each cup makes a hefty snack portion.

Perfect for holidays and parties

These charcuterie cups can truly elevate any event. Their variety make them a crowd-pleaser for so many occasions like:

  • Bridal showers
  • Weddings
  • Summer parties
  • Mother's Day
  • Christmas
  • Holiday gatherings
  • Game nights 
  • Family celebrations
Mackenzie holding charcuterie cup at bridal shower
Close up of many finished charcuterie cups

Perfect for Valentine's Day too!

These charcuterie cups are easy to customize for any occasion-including Valentine's Day! Swap in festive elements like heart-shaped cheese, strawberries, and a red-and-pink color theme to make them extra special for a romantic date night, Galentine's gathering, or even a Valentine's-themed party. I made these stickers in Canva and ordered the red cups on Amazon!

Want this in board form? Check out my Valentine's Charcuterie Board guide!

Valentine's Day Charcuterie Cups

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these cups are completely customizable. You get to choose what ingredients you want to use. Here's some ideas of items to fill your individual charcuterie with. Remember: you can always do a mixture too!

  • Nuts of your choice: Pistachios, walnuts, almonds, cashews, etc. 
  • Cheese of your choice: White cheddar, gouda, brie, mozzarella pearls, etc.
  • Meat of your choice: Prosciutto, turkey slices, salami, mortadella, etc.
  • Fruit of your choice: Berries, grapes, figs, etc.
Close up of charcuterie cups with cheese and meat

Could I add veggies to this charcuterie cup?

For this recipe, we focused more on making fruit charcuterie cups. However, you could certainly add some veggies into the mix if you'd like. Small veggies like cherry tomatoes or cucumber slices are typically best for skewering.

Can I make these individual charcuterie cups ahead of time?

These charcuterie cups are best fresh but you can also assemble them up to 24 hours ahead of time. Just be sure to cover them with plastic wrap (or the plastic covers these charcuterie cups come with) so the cheese doesn't get hard. Then, store in the fridge to keep them fresh. Add the crackers right before serving otherwise they will get soggy in the fridge.

Cups wrapped in plastic
Cups wrapped in plastic on serving tray

How do I store leftovers?

If you end up with any leftover cups you can either cover them with saran wrap or move the charcuterie skewers over to an airtight container. Either way, these should last in the fridge for up to 2 days. If the crackers become soft, replace them with fresh ones before enjoying again.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Individual Charcuterie Cups 12
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Individual Charcuterie Cups

These mini Charcuterie Cups are seriously the most impressive appetizer for any gathering. Plus, you get to customize with your favorite nuts, cheese, meats, fruits, and crackers. They get a bite of sweetness with Natural Delights Mini Medjool date rolls too!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 390kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Charcuterie Cups with Toothpicks and Bags

Ingredients

1 cup mixed nuts of your choice:

  • Almonds
  • Cashews
  • Pecans
  • Pistachios
  • Walnuts

8 ounces (1 cup) cheese cubes of your choice:

  • White cheddar
  • Swiss
  • Gouda
  • Sharp cheddar
  • Mozzarella pearls
  • Brie Bites
  • Parmesan

8 ounces meat of your choice:

  • Salami
  • Soppressata
  • Prosciutto
  • Mortadella
  • Summer sausage
  • Deli meat

1 cup fruit of your choice:

  • Strawberries
  • Raspberries
  • Strawberry Halves
  • Blueberries
  • Cherries pitted
  • Grapes
  • Figs
  • Sliced Apples
  • Grapes red or green
  • Olives

1 cup Natural Delights Mini Medjool dates (~16 pieces)

  • Coconut Mini Medjools
  • Cacao Pecan Mini Medjools
  • Sweet & Salty Almond Mini Medjools

16 crackers of your choice:

  • Multigrain Crackers
  • Flatbread Crackers
  • Crisps
  • Mini Rice cakes
  • Sliced Baguettes
  • Chia Seed Crackers
  • Pita Chips
  • Tortilla Chips
  • Pretzels
  • Nut Thins
  • Mini Breadsticks

Fresh herbs of your choice, for garnish:

  • Thyme
  • Rosemary
  • Basil
  • Mint
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Place a layer of mixed nuts at the bottom of each cup (about 2 tablespoons per cup). This helps weigh down the charcuterie cups.
  • Thread a toothpick or small skewer with a small cheese cube, piece of sliced meat, piece of fruit, and a Natural Delights Mini Medjool. Repeat to make about 2-3 skewers.
  • Insert the prepared skewers into the cups, standing upright in the nuts.*
  • Right before you're ready to serve, add 2-3 crackers around the skewer. Finally, garnish with a few sprigs of fresh herbs.

Notes

*Make ahead note: If making the cups ahead of time, stop at this step, cover with saran wrap and store in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Then, add the crackers and herbs right before serving otherwise they will get soggy in the fridge.
Distribution Note: There’s no real exact science to making charcuterie in a cup. That means you can really make it your own! However, this is about how much is in each cup for the nutrition information provided: ~2 tablespoons of mixed nuts ~1 ounce (~2 tablespoons) cheese ~2-3 slices of meat ~2-3 pieces of fruit ~2 Natural Delights Mini Medjools ~2-3 crackers.
Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may greatly vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for walnuts, cheddar cheese, salami, Mini Medjools, and multigrain crackers. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 1charcuterie cup | Calories: 390kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 750mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 9g | Calcium: 230mg

save this individual charcuterie cups recipe on pinterest:

Individual charcuterie ready for parties

try these other charcuterie recipes too:

  • Breakfast Charcuterie Board
  • Valentine's Charcuterie Board
  • Fall Charcuterie Board

Customizable Glazed Walnuts

June 25, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

These crunchy glazed walnuts are the perfect savory bite to snack on at home. They are seriously so easy to make and call for just a few simple pantry ingredients and spices. Vegan and gluten-free friendly. Plus, you can make them in either the oven or air fryer!

Close up of texture of golden brown crispy walnuts

This post was first published on April 17, 2020. It was updated on June 25, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

Table of Contents

  • Are you team sweet or savory?
  • Are walnuts healthy?
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make maple glazed walnuts
    • 1. Prepare the glaze
    • 2. Add walnuts to the glaze
    • 3. Cook the walnuts until crispy
  • Can you make glazed walnuts in the air fryer?
  • Tips and tricks
  • How should I enjoy these walnuts?
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make these glazed walnuts ahead of time?
    • save this maple glazed walnuts recipe on pinterest:
  • Recipes to pair these glazed walnuts with:

Are you team sweet or savory?

I'm all about snacking. It's a great way to meet your nutrition needs and satisfy cravings between meals.

It's hard for me to choose a team because I love both sweet and savory snacks. Some of my favorite sweet snacks are date "snickers", energy bites, or a loaded yogurt parfait.

On the savory side, I love hummus and veggies, roasted chickpeas, or putting these together in a cute Starbucks style bistro box. If you have a group, it's fun to build your own snack board and display them all together in a Insta-worthy way.

These maple or honey glazed walnuts have both the sweet and savory-giving you the best of both worlds. Roasting them allows them to crisp up and give it that wonderful crunch.

Picking up a walnut from bowl

Are walnuts healthy?

Walnuts are an excellent source of healthy fats, protein, and fiber. This trio of nutrients helps fill you up and stay healthy. Walnuts are also the only nut to provide an excellent source of heart-healthy omega-3 (ALA) fatty acids, which are beneficial for heart health. Research has shown enjoying walnuts (and other nuts) regularly can help with weight management too.

Ingredients for honey glazed walnuts

Ingredients you'll need

Chances are, you have all of the ingredients for this recipe lying around your kitchen. I love using fresh grated ginger and garlic as it adds an extra pop of flavor. However, if you don't have these, skip an unnecessary trip to the store and use ground ginger and garlic powder instead. Either way, they are so delicious!

  • Soy Sauce/Tamari/Coconut Aminos: Choose based on your dietary needs. Tamari is gluten-free, and coconut aminos is soy-free.
  • Maple Syrup/Honey: Opt for pure maple syrup or raw honey for the best health benefits. If you're looking for a zero sugar option, you could try a zero sugar honey substitute. Please note: I have not tested these walnuts with a zero sugar substitute yet.
  • Rice Vinegar: Adds a subtle tang that balances the sweetness.
  • Ginger: Freshly grated or ground ginger adds a warm, spicy note.
  • Garlic: Fresh minced garlic or garlic powder enhances the savory flavor.
  • Sesame Seeds: Adds a nutty crunch and a touch of calcium.
  • Walnuts: Best when fresh and whole for maximum crunch and flavor.

How to make maple glazed walnuts

These easy roasted walnuts are seriously so easy to make. Here's how...

1. Prepare the glaze

In a medium-sized bowl, stir together sauce, honey/maple syrup, rice vinegar, ginger, garlic, and sesame seeds until well combined.

Glazed walnuts in a small white bowl before baking

2. Add walnuts to the glaze

Add 1 cup of walnuts to the glaze bowl and stir until they are evenly coated with the glaze.

3. Cook the walnuts until crispy

These walnuts should be baked at a low temperature of 250°F for 30-40 minutes, until golden and crisp. Be sure to stir halfway through and periodically check on walnuts to ensure they don't burn.

Glazed walnuts in a small white bowl

Can you make glazed walnuts in the air fryer?

In the summertime, I love air frying these walnuts so it doesn't heat up the house. Add the coated walnuts to a parchment lined air fryer basket and air fry for 12-14 minutes at 250 degrees. Check on them halfway through to stir and ensure they don't burn. Once done cooking, let them cool in the air fryer basket completely before enjoying.

Air fried walnuts
Glazed nuts in air fryer

Tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: These walnuts are great on their own, but they also make a fantastic topping for salads, or power bowls.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If the walnuts are not as crisp as you'd like, bake or air fry them a bit longer, checking every couple minutes to avoid burning.
  • Scaling Tips: To double the recipe, simply double all the ingredients and ensure the walnuts are spread out evenly on the baking sheet.
Close up of glazed walnuts with sesame seeds

How should I enjoy these walnuts?

I love to sprinkle these walnuts over power bowls, glazed salmon, or fresh popcorn. They are also delicious enjoyed on their own. A healthy serving of walnuts is ¼ cup or about a palm full. A handful of walnuts is a versatile snack and can satisfy any taste preference, both savory and sweet.

Customize it your way

For this recipe, you get to choose your preferred sauce and liquid sweetener.

  • Sauce of your choice: Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. We normally use low sodium soy sauce, but tamari and coconut aminos are also both amazing gluten-free alternatives. And super tasty!
  • Liquid sweetener of your choice: You can make either maple glazed walnuts or honey glazed walnuts. Using pure maple syrup will make this recipe vegan friendly. If you're using honey and it's hard, be sure to melt it before adding.
Sauce of your choice

Can I make these glazed walnuts ahead of time?

Yes, you can make them ahead of time. Prepare and bake them as directed, then store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 1 week.

Soy Glazed Walnuts 7
Print Recipe
4.41 from 22 votes

Savory Glazed Walnuts

These crunchy glazed walnuts are a delicious savory snack. They are so easy to make and call for just a few simple pantry ingredients and spices!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Snack Choices
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: dairy free, gluten free, vegan, walnuts
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 190kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (low sodium soy sauce, tamari, coconut aminos, or liquid aminos)
  • 1 tablespoon liquid sweetener of your choice (maple syrup or honey)
  • 1 teaspoon rice vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon grated ginger or ½ teaspoon ground ginger
  • 1 teaspoon grated garlic or ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds
  • 1 cup walnut halves
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Stir all ingredients except the walnuts together in a medium sized bowl until everything is combined. Then, add in the walnuts and stir until walnuts are evenly coated.
  • Oven Instructions: Spread walnuts in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or lightly greased. Bake at 250°F for 30-40 minutes, until golden and crisp. Be sure to stir halfway through and periodically check on walnuts to ensure they don't burn. Take walnuts out of the oven and let cool completely before eating.
  • Air Fryer Instructions: Add glazed walnuts to a parchment lined air fryer basket and air fry for 12-14 minutes at 250 degrees. Check on them halfway through to stir and ensure they don't burn. Once done cooking, let them cool in the air fryer basket completely before enjoying.
  • Store nuts in an airtight container for up to one week.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 0.25cup | Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Sodium: 140mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Calcium: 28mg

save this maple glazed walnuts recipe on pinterest:

Picking up a glazed walnut snack

Recipes to pair these glazed walnuts with:

  • Greek Chopped Salad
  • Pea Pasta with Parmesan
  • Customizable Snack Board

How to Make Proffee (Protein Coffee)

June 17, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

This 3-ingredient "proffee" protein coffee recipe is a healthy spin on a traditional latte. Customize with any protein powder of your choice. Instructions on how to make proffee for both hot and iced coffee.

Vanilla protein coffees next to each other

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • What is proffee?
  • Is coffee with protein powder healthy?
  • What protein powder should I use? 
    • Can I use egg white protein powder?
    • Here are some of my favorites:
    • Can I use a store bought protein shake instead of protein powder? 
    • Is this coffee sweet?
  • How to make protein coffee with protein powder
    • How to make hot protein coffee
    • How to make iced protein coffee
  • Cold brew vs iced coffee
    • Here are some of my favorite coffee finds:
  • What if I don't have a milk frother?
  • Tips and tricks
  • What should I eat with my protein powder coffee? 
  • Can I make this proffee ahead of time?
  • Need more hands-on help with recipes?
    • Try these other recipes using protein powder:
    • save this vanilla protein coffee recipe on pinterest:

This post was first published on January 11, 2022. It was updated on June 17, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

What is proffee?

"Proffee" is a term coined for protein coffee. It's exactly how it sounds-the idea of putting protein powder in coffee. 

This trend really took off on TikTok with all types of proffee like hot lattes, collagen coffee, or protein iced coffee.

Coffee made with protein powder

Is coffee with protein powder healthy?

If you're craving a creamy hot or iced latte without all the sugar, this is the recipe for you. This is definitely a healthier option than a flavored latte which averages about 35 grams of sugar. Instead this proffee packs in 10 grams of protein and little to no added sugar. This proffee recipe is also low in calories with just 70 calories per cup. 

Protein is an important nutrient that helps us feel fuller longer. In fact, research shows those who follow a moderate to high protein diet may have greater weight loss.

Coffee also has health benefits. Recent research found those who consistently drank 1-2 cups of coffee per day had lower rates of cognitive impairment compared with those who rarely drank coffee.

What protein powder should I use? 

Like all of my other recipes, this proffee recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder you want to use. This means you can easily choose one that's vegan or lactose-free if needed. You can also use a collagen peptides powder.

When looking for a protein powder, I recommend choosing one with little to no added sugar and quality ingredients. For this recipe, stay away from any fruity flavors of protein powder-trust me they don't taste good with coffee. Instead, stick with ones like vanilla, chocolate, caramel, or other flavors you commonly see at your local cafe.

Can I use egg white protein powder?

Unfortunately, egg white protein powder doesn't work well in this hot coffee mix. Egg whites can clump or even cook slightly when mixed with hot liquids. Instead, opt for whey, casein, or plant-based protein powders that blend smoothly in hot drinks.

Close up of hot coffee with cinnamon on top

Here are some of my favorites:

  • Naked Nutrition - These powder typically contain only 1 to 3 high quality ingredients. Plus, they have options for all dietary preferences including tons of vegan powders.  
  • Designer Protein - These powders contain 23 essential vitamins and minerals for health. 
  • Pure Protein - Their vanilla cream flavor is super delicious and low in sugar.
  • Clean Simple Eats Protein Powder and/or Collagen - They have tons of delicious flavors and these powders easily mix into this protein coffee. I often use their Simply Vanilla as a go-to option!
  • Further Foods Collagen - This collagen powder is unflavored but also comes in vanilla, chocolate, and hazelnut.

Can I use a store bought protein shake instead of protein powder? 

On TikTok, you'll often see people stirring protein shakes like Premier Protein into their proffee. While I haven't tested this out a ton, you can probably get away with mixing 6 ounces of a protein shake with 6 ounces of coffee.

Close up of iced coffee with foam on top

Is this coffee sweet?

Depending on the protein you use for your proffee, you may need to adjust the sweetness. I typically use a vanilla protein powder and find that it's sweet enough and tastes just like a vanilla latte! 

However, if you are using a less sweet or unflavored powder, you'll probably want to stir in a bit of sweetener like stevia or monkfruit with the protein powder.

Hot proffee on wood platter

How to make protein coffee with protein powder

This recipe is SO easy to make and requires just 3 ingredients. If you're a visual learner like me, watch the step-by-step video below in the recipe card. You can also see it in action on this Google Web Story. Let's break it down for both hot and iced.

How to make hot protein coffee

  1. Mix together the powder and milk: In a coffee mug, combine 3 tablespoons of protein powder and ¼ cup of milk. Use a milk frother to whisk until smooth and frothy.
  2. Add coffee: Pour 6 ounces of hot brewed coffee over the mixture while stirring continuously.
Pouring milk over protein coffee glass
Pouring milk over protein coffee glass
Pouring milk over protein coffee glass
Pouring coffee over protein coffee glass
Foam over hot coffee

How to make iced protein coffee

  1. Mix together the powder and milk: In a tall glass, combine 3 tablespoons of protein powder and ¼ cup of milk. Use a milk frother to whisk until smooth and frothy.
  2. Add coffee: Pour 6 ounces of cold brew coffee over the mixture while stirring continuously. Then, top with ice. I've tested this recipe with cold brew, but I'm you could swap to iced coffee as well. Cold brew is pretty strong, so swapping for iced coffee is a good option if you want it to be less strong.

And that's it! Making proffee is really just as simple as whisking protein powder in coffee!

Pouring milk over protein coffee glass
Pouring milk over protein coffee glass
Milk frother
Pouring coffee over protein coffee glass
Iced protein coffee with ice in glass

Cold brew vs iced coffee

Cold brew coffee is made by steeping coffee grounds in cold water for 12-24 hours. It tends to have higher amounts of caffeine but is less acidic than iced coffee. Iced coffee on the other hand is hot brewed coffee that has been cooled down and served over ice.

Whether you prefer the milder taste of cold brew or the stronger flavor of iced coffee, either option provides a delicious base for your protein coffee.

You can even buy ready-to-go iced or cold brew coffee, or you can opt to make your own.

Iced proffee on wood platter

Here are some of my favorite coffee finds:

  • Starbucks Unsweetened Iced Coffee - Delicious and buying unsweetened allows you to sweeten to your liking.
  • Wandering Bear Cold Brew Coffee - Ready-to-go and extra strong. Just note: it has 150mg caffeine per 6 ounce serving!
  • Takeya Cold Brew Coffee Maker - I'm not lying when I say I have this in my fridge at ALL TIMES. It's super easy to use-just add coffee grounds to the filter and steep for 24 hours before removing the grounds. Then you have homemade, inexpensive cold brew concentrate.

What if I don't have a milk frother?

If you don't have a milk frother, you can vigorously stir with a spoon or fork. It just won't be quite as frothy and may leave some clumps. I know it's kind of a hassle, but you could also blend it a blender to make it frothy!

Frothed milk on top of proffee

Tips and tricks

This recipe can be a starting point, but then you can tweak it. If you find that your coffee is too strong or too weak after making it, here's what to do.

  • If Your Coffee is Too Strong: Dilute with more milk or ice. You could even add a couple tablespoons of your favorite creamer.
  • If Your Coffee is Too Weak: Add a bit extra coffee into the mixture.

What should I eat with my protein powder coffee? 

As a dietitian, I'm a big advocate of breakfast… even if it's just something small. While this coffee contains some calories and protein, I would recommend pairing it with something else. Try a creamy smoothie bowl, mason jar overnight oats, or make ahead energy bites. I even love these caramel protein balls as a fun pairing!

You know I'm all about balance too. So if you're craving you're protein coffee with something more indulgent like a croissant or biscotti, go for it! Just practice mindful eating tactics by limiting distractions and really savoring each bite and sip.

Dipping biscotti into hot protein coffee

Can I make this proffee ahead of time?

Sort of! You can froth together the protein powder and milk then store in the fridge the night before. When you're ready to drink in the morning, simply add your coffee and give it a good stir!

Need more hands-on help with recipes?

This proffee recipe is one I recommend all the time to my 1:1 coaching clients. In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about this virtual program with myself, a registered dietitian nutritionist!

Protein Coffee 29
Print Recipe
4.61 from 28 votes

How to Make Proffee (Protein Coffee)

This 3-ingredient "proffee" is a healthy spin on a traditional latte. Customize with any protein powder of your choice. Instructions included for both hot and iced coffee. Depending on the powder you use, this coffee packs in 10 grams of protein!
Prep Time2 minutes mins
Total Time2 minutes mins
Course: Drink Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: 3 ingredient, proffee, protein coffee, protein powder in coffee
Servings: 1 coffee
Calories: 70kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Takeya Cold Brew Coffee Maker - I seriously use this every single day
  • Unsweetened Iced Coffee
  • Cold Brew Coffee
  • Milk Frother

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons (weighs ~15 grams) protein powder of your choice* (I recommend using a flavor that pairs well with coffee like vanilla or chocolate. Feel free to use any type of protein powder such as whey, pea, or soy. You can also use collagen powder. The only protein powder I would NOT recommend using is egg white protein powder as it can clump up in hot liquids.)
  • ¼ cup milk of your choice (dairy milk, almond milk, soy milk, oat milk, etc.)
  • 6 ounces fresh brewed hot coffee or cold brew coffee (see recommended products above)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

How to Make Hot Protein Coffee:

  • To a coffee mug, add protein powder and milk. Use a milk frother to whisk until no clumps are remaining and the mixture is frothy. 
  • While continuing to stir, pour over hot brewed coffee.

How to Make Iced Protein Coffee:

  • To a tall glass, add protein powder and milk. Use a milk frother to whisk until no clumps are remaining and the mixture is frothy. 
  • While continuing to stir, pour over cold brew coffee. Then, top with ice.

Video

Notes

*Sweetener note: If you are using an unflavored powder, you may want to stir in a bit of sweetener like stevia or monkfruit with the protein powder.
Frother note: If you don’t have a milk frother, you can vigorously stir with a spoon. It just won’t be quite as frothy or as evenly mixed.
Protein Powder note: See my protein powder recommendations in the blog post above!

Nutrition

Serving: 1coffee | Calories: 70kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 2g | Sodium: 80mg | Fiber: 1g

Try these other recipes using protein powder:

  • Protein Mug Cake
  • Collagen Banana Bread 
  • Salted Caramel Protein Bites
  • Protein Pancakes
  • Cookie Dough made with protein powder

save this vanilla protein coffee recipe on pinterest:

Iced protein coffee next to hot protein coffee

Easy Thai-Style Peanut Sauce

June 17, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 12 Comments

Looking for a delicious flavorful sauce to add to noodles, salads, and power bowls? Try this easy Thai inspired Peanut Sauce. Just 8 simple ingredients and no blender needed! Watch the video in the recipe card below to see how easy it is to make! 

Close up of spoonful of thai peanut sauce

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • What is peanut sauce?
  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • Are peanuts healthy?
    • How to make this easy thai-style peanut sauce
    • Customize it your way
  • Can I make this satay sauce ahead of time?
    • How long will this sauce last?
    • What should I use this peanut sauce for? 
    • You can try adding this sauce to these recipes too:
    • save this easy peanut sauce on pinterest:

This post was first published on October 20, 2020. It was updated on June 17, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

What is peanut sauce?

If you haven't had peanut sauce before, you're in for a treat. This is hands down my favorite sauce ever. 

Peanut sauce, also often called satay sauce, is commonly used over grilled meat skewers. The traditional sauce uses ingredients like fish sauce, tamarind pasta, and coconut milk. However, I decided to mix it up a bit and use ingredients that I more commonly have in my pantry.

Dipping chicken skewer in peanut sauce

Why you'll love it

This peanut sauce is not only delicious but also incredibly versatile. Here's why you'll love it:

  • Quick and Easy: With just 8 ingredients, you can whip up this sauce in minutes.
  • Versatile: Perfect for dipping, drizzling over salads, or mixing into noodles.
  • Customizable: You can easily make this sauce soy-free by using tamari or coconut aminos instead.

Ingredients you'll need

This sauce whips up in no time with common ingredients you'll find at most grocery stores. This peanut sauce does not use coconut milk. Here are the main ingredients you'll need for this delightful sauce:

  • Creamy Peanut Butter: Smooth and rich, the base of the sauce. You can also make your own homemade peanut butter.
  • Sauce of your choice: Looking for a peanut sauce without soy sauce? For this recipe, feel free to use low-sodium soy sauce, tamari or coconut aminos.
  • Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice for a zesty tang.
  • Rice Vinegar: Balances the flavors with a mild acidity.
  • Maple Syrup: A touch of sweetness that complements the other flavors. 
  • Sesame Oil: Provides a deep, nutty aroma.
  • Garlic: Freshly minced or grated for a pungent kick.
  • Fresh Ginger: Adds warmth and a slight spiciness.
Ingredients like peanut butter, soy sauce, and limes set out

Are peanuts healthy?

Peanuts are a nutrient-dense food that offers several health benefits. They are rich in healthy fats, particularly monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fats, which can help reduce the risk of heart disease . 

Peanuts are also a good source of protein and fiber. Recent research shows incorporating nuts (including peanuts) into your day can lead to improved levels of fullness .

Peanuts also contain various vitamins and minerals, such as vitamin E, magnesium, copper, and iron, which contribute to overall health and well-being .

How to make this easy thai-style peanut sauce

All you do is add all ingredients to a medium sized bowl and whisk with a fork until smooth. That's it. Don't believe me? Watch the video below to see this sauce in action!

  1. Combine Ingredients: In a medium-sized bowl, add the peanut butter, soy sauce, lime juice, rice vinegar, maple syrup, sesame oil, minced garlic, and minced ginger.
  2. Whisk Together: Use a fork to whisk the ingredients until well combined.
  3. Adjust Consistency: Add a couple of tablespoons of water to achieve your desired consistency.
  4. Store: Transfer the sauce to an airtight container and store in the fridge.
All sauce ingredients in bowl
Sauce whisked together with limes on the side

If the sauce is too thick, feel free to add 2 tablespoons of water to thin, or more as needed. It tends to thicken overnight so you may need to add a small amount of water to it the next day.

If you're looking to kick up the heat, add in ½ teaspoon sriracha, or more to your taste. 

If you don't have rice vinegar or sesame oil on hand, you can omit these. However, the fresh garlic and ginger are crucial for the vibrant flavor. I always like to save time by buying these ready-to-go tubes or garlic and ginger paste.

Creamy peanut butter sauce in a mason jar

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this peanut sauce is customizable. You get to choose what kind of sauce you want to use so you can easily make it soy-free and gluten-free if needed.

  • Sauce of your choice: Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari is gluten-free and coconut aminos is both gluten-free and soy-free.
Peanut sauce dripping off spoon

Can I make this satay sauce ahead of time?

Yes! This sauce is perfect for meal prep. Make it ahead of time then store it until you're ready to use.

How long will this sauce last?

Store any leftover sauce in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze it for up to 3 months. I would recommend freezing in silicone ice cube trays, 4 ounce mason jars, or small tupperwares so you can have single servings of sauce ready to thaw for your meal.

What should I use this peanut sauce for? 

I add this savory peanut sauce to just about everything. Drizzle over take out leftovers, use as a dipping sauce for spring rolls, or marinate meat in it. It's also the perfect sauce to add flavor to any bland meals or meal prep recipes.

Satay sauce served on top of grain bowl

You can try adding this sauce to these recipes too:

  • Peanut Sauce Salad
  • Customizable Power Bowls
  • Chicken and Broccoli Meal Prep
thai peanut sauce 9
Print Recipe
4.62 from 13 votes

Easy Thai-Style Peanut Sauce

Add this versatile sauce to noodles, salads, grain bowls, or chicken skewers. Just 8 simple ingredients and no blender needed making for easy clean up!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Cuisine: Thai
Keyword: easy, peanut butter, peanut sauce, thai, vegan
Servings: 1 cup
Calories: 240kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Grated Garlic and Ginger (This comes pre-grated and saves so much time!)

Ingredients

  • ½ cup creamy peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoons sauce of your choice (low sodium soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice, about 1 large lime squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
  • 1 tablespoon garlic, minced or grated (about 3 cloves)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger, minced or grated (about 1-inch piece)
  • 2 tablespoons water
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Combine all ingredients in a medium sized bowl and whisk with a fork until combined. If you prefer a thinner sauce, add a couple more tablespoons of water.*
  • Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Notes

*This sauce thickens up overnight. Add a small amount of water the next day if needed.

Nutrition

Serving: 1¼ cup | Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 290mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g

save this easy peanut sauce on pinterest:

8 ingredient peanut sauce

Southwest Potato Foil Packets

June 5, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

Looking for a hassle-free BBQ side dish bursting with flavor? These Southwest Potato Foil Packets are perfect for a quick and easy summer side that you can enjoy on the grill, in the oven, or in the air fryer. It's a tasty combination of colorful vegetables and hearty potatoes, all seasoned with bold southwest spices. Plus, you get to customize with toppings of your choice like cheese, cilantro, and avocado!

Southwest potato foil packets garnished with avocado and cilantro

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make southwest potato foil packets
  • Tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save these potato foil packets on pinterest:
  • Want more? Try these other grilling recipes:

Why you'll love it

These Southwest Potato Foil Packets are delicious and convenient. I tend to make them every summer for Father's Day, outdoor dinners, or weekend BBQs. Here's why you'll find yourself making them again and again:

  • Flavorful and Versatile: The mixture of baby potatoes, bell peppers, onions, corn, and black beans seasoned with garlic, chili powder, and cumin offers a burst of flavors. You can easily tweak  the spices to suit your taste.
  • Easy Cleanup: Cooking everything in foil packets means there's minimal cleanup. It's perfect for those nights when you want a delicious meal without the hassle of dishes. 
  • Customizable Toppings: Add your favorite toppings like sprinkle of cheese, fresh cilantro, creamy avocado, and a squeeze of lime for a fresh zesty finish. Adjust the amount of toppings to make it truly your own.
Close up of southwest potato packet in white bowl

Why is it healthy?

These foil packets are packed with nutritious ingredients:

  • Potatoes are a nutrient-dense vegetable. They contain vitamin C, potassium, 2 grams of fiber and 3 grams of protein per medium potato. 
  • Bell Peppers are loaded with vitamins A and C, which can help support your immune system and skin health.
  • Black Beans are a great source of plant-based protein and fiber, which support muscle repair and a healthy digestive system. You may end up with some extra black beans which are perfect for add over quinoa taco bowls or meal prep breakfast burritos.
  • Corn adds natural sweetness and antioxidants like lutein.

Ingredients you'll need

  • Baby Potatoes - These small potatoes cook quickly and have a creamy texture. You can also use fingerling potatoes.
  • Bell Pepper - Choose your favorite color. Bell peppers add sweetness and crunch, and you can find them fresh year-round. These are also a great one to pick up at your local farmers market!
  • Onion - Onion adds depth and a slight sweetness. Slice it thinly for even cooking.
  • Corn Kernels - Fresh, frozen, or canned are all welcome here! 
  • Black Beans - Be sure to drain and rinse the beans before adding to the potatoes.
Potato Foil Packets 3
Potato Foil Packets 4

How to make southwest potato foil packets

  1. Prep the Vegetables: In a large bowl, mix together the potatoes, bell peppers, onion, corn, and black beans. Make sure the potatoes are cut to be all about the same size for even cooking.
  2. Season: Drizzle with olive oil and season with garlic powder, chili powder, cumin, salt, and pepper. Toss everything to coat the vegetables evenly.
  3. Assemble Packets: Tear off 4 large sheets of aluminum foil or you can buy pre-cut squares of foil. Divide the seasoned vegetable mixture among the sheets, placing it in the center of each foil.
  4. Seal Packets: Fold the foil over the vegetables, sealing the edges to form packets. If you accidentally tear the foil, no worries! Just wrap another piece of foil over it. 
  5. Cook: There's three different ways you can cook these potato packets.
    • Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high. Place the foil packets on the grill, cover, and cook for about 25-30 minutes, or until the potatoes are fork tender.
    • Oven: Alternatively, bake the assembled foil packets at 425°F (220°C) for 25-30 minutes in a preheated oven.
    • Air Fryer: Air fry at 400°F for 20-25 minutes.
  6. Serve: Carefully open the packets, being mindful of the hot steam. Sprinkle with cheese, chopped cilantro, diced avocado, and a squeeze of fresh lime juice. 
Foil packet on the grill
Foil packet on the grill next to broccolini

Tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Elevate your grilled potatoes in foil by pairing them with a protein like juicy burgers or grilled chicken. They are also delicious served alongside grilled broccolini! 
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If your potatoes aren't tender after the recommended cooking time, simply reseal the packets and cook for another 5 to 10 minutes.
  • Scaling Tips: Hosting a crowd? This recipe can easily be doubled or tripled. Just make sure you can plenty of room to grill them all!.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these Southwest Potato Foil Packets are completely customizable. You get to choose what ingredients you want to use:

  • Bell Pepper of your choice: Use any sweet bell pepper like red, yellow, or orange. You could even use green bell pepper, they just won't be as sweet. When slicing them, I tend to slice them lengthwise, then cut that slice in half so it creates a half slice.
  • Shredded cheese of your choice: You can use any cheese you like such as shredded cheddar or a Mexican cheese blend. 
  • Toppings of your choice: Feel free to add all toppings or none at all. You know I'm all about customizing your recipes too, so feel free to add other toppings like sour cream, plain Greek yogurt, chopped chives/green onions, pickled red onions, or jalapeños for your own flare.
Southwest grilled potato foil packets garnished with avocado and cilantro

Can I make it ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prepare the potato mixture and seal them in the foil packets up to a day ahead. Store them in the fridge until you're ready to cook. This makes it perfect for meal prepping or a busy weeknight dinner.

How do I store leftovers?

If you have leftover cooked foil packets, store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat, you can place the packets back on the grill or microwave (out of the foil)  until warmed through. 

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Potato Foil Packets 7
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Southwest Potato Foil Packets

These Southwest Potato Foil Packets are perfect for a quick and easy summer side that you can enjoy on the grill, in the oven, or in the air fryer. It's a tasty combination of colorful vegetables and hearty potatoes, all seasoned with bold southwest spices. Customize with toppings of your choices like cheese, cilantro, and avocado!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 141kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby potatoes quartered
  • 1 bell pepper of your choice, sliced into small strips (red, orange, or yellow bell pepper)
  • ½ medium onion, sliced into small strips
  • ½ cup fresh or canned corn
  • ½ cup canned black beans, drained and rinsed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • Salt and pepper, to taste

Toppings of your choice:

  • Shredded cheese of your choice (mexican blend, cheddar, parmesan, pepper jack, monterey jack, vegan cheese, etc.)
  • Finely chopped cilantro
  • Diced avocado
  • Lime wedges, for juicing
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • In a large bowl, mix together potatoes, bell peppers, onion, corn, and black beans. Drizzle with olive oil and season with garlic powder, chili powder, cumin, salt, and pepper. Toss to coat evenly.
  • Tear off 6 large sheets of aluminum foil. Divide the potato mixture among the sheets, placing it in the center. Fold the foil over the vegetables, sealing the edges to form packets.
  • Preheat the grill to medium-high. Place the foil packets on the grill, cover, and cook for about 25-30 minutes, or until the potatoes are fork tender.
  • Remove from the grill, then open the packets carefully and sprinkle over your desired amount of cheese, chopped cilantro, avocado, and fresh lime juice.

Notes

Pepper Slicing Note: When slicing peppers for this recipe, slice them lengthwise like normal. Then, cut that slice in half so it creates a smaller half slice.
Toppings Note: You know I’m all about customizing your recipes, so feel free to add other toppings like sour cream, plain Greek yogurt, chopped chives/green onions, pickled red onions, or jalapeños for your own flare.
Oven Cooking Instructions: Alternatively, you can bake the assembled foil packets in an oven at 425°F for 25-30 minutes.
Air Fryer Cooking Instructions: Alternatively, you can air fry the assembled foil packets at 400°F for 20-25 minutes.
Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for ingredients. This calculation does not include toppings. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 141kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 133mg | Potassium: 590mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 2mg

save these potato foil packets on pinterest:

Grilled potato foil packets to make during the summer

Want more? Try these other grilling recipes:

  • Grilled Broccolini
  • Grilled Lemon Chicken and Asparagus Salad with Creamy Feta Sauce
  • Grilled Steak & Pineapple Skewers

Grilled Broccolini

June 3, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This Grilled Broccolini is perfect for a quick, nutritious side dish for grilling. Have it alongside burgers and potatoes at summer BBQs or Father's Day. Plus, you get to customize this recipe with your favorite oil and seasonings.

Grilled broccolini charred on barbecue grill with smokey flavor

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Broccolini vs. broccoli nutrition
  • Can I substitute broccoli?
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make grilled broccolini
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this grilled broccolini recipe on pinterest:
  • try these other delicious sides too:

Why you'll love it

This dish is perfect for barbecues or outdoor dinners. This is one of my dad's all-time favorite sides so we tend to make it every Father's Day! 

You'll love it because it's:

  • Quick and easy: Takes just a few minutes to grill!
  • Nutrient-rich: Packed with vitamins A, C, and K.
  • Customizable: You can season it however you like.
Tossing broccolini with tongs on grill

Is broccolini healthy?

Broccolini is a mix between regular broccoli and Chinese broccoli. It has a bit of a milder, sweeter taste. It's low in calories and high in fiber, vitamins, and minerals. Recent research is showing the potential of eating cruciferous vegetables (like broccolini!) and helping improve things like heart health, blood sugar control, and cholesterol levels.

Plus, grilling this broccolini with oils like avocado or olive oil provides healthy fats that are good for your heart too.

Broccolini vs. broccoli nutrition

Broccolini and broccoli have similar nutrients, both offering vitamin C, vitamin K, protein, fiber, and antioxidants. However, broccolini tends to have a milder, sweeter taste compared to the more robust flavor of broccoli. Its tender stems and delicate florets make it perfect for grilling and roasting.

Can I substitute broccoli?

Yes, you can substitute broccoli for broccolini in this recipe. To do so, cut the broccoli into smaller, bite-sized florets and slice the stems into thinner pieces to ensure even cooking. This will help mimic the tender texture of broccolini. Keep in mind that broccoli might take slightly longer to grill, so adjust the cooking time accordingly until the broccoli is tender and charred in spots.

Broccolini in a white pan before cooking

Ingredients you'll need

  • Broccolini: Look for bundles that are fresh and bright green. You bundle or bag should be about 10 ounces. It's sometimes called "baby broccoli" in stores as well.
  • Garlic: Minced fresh garlic cloves add a punch of flavor. You'll need about three cloves.
  • Lemon: Both the zest and juice of half a lemon will brighten up the dish.
  • Seasonings: Choose your favorite - red pepper flakes for a bit of heat; Italian seasoning for a classic touch; or your go-to all purpose seasoning. Really any seasoning goes here!

How to make grilled broccolini

  1. Preheat your grill: Set it to medium-high heat.
  2. Toss ingredients: In a large bowl, combine the broccolini, oil, garlic, lemon zest, lemon juice, and seasonings. Mix until the broccolini is well-coated.
  3. Grill the broccolini: Place the broccolini on the grill in a single layer. Use tongs to turn occasionally, until tender and charred in spots.
  4. Serve: Remove from the grill and squeeze more fresh lemon juice over the top if desired.
Grill out with burgers, broccolini, and potato foil packets

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving tips: Pair your grilled broccolini with a grilled steak, salmon, or juicy burger. For a plant-based option, we love using Beyond Burgers which taste just like a classic burger. They are nourishing with only 2 grams of saturated fat too.
  • Troubleshooting tips: If your broccolini is starting to char too much, reduce the grill heat slightly. If it's not charring, turn up the heat or grill for a bit longer.
  • Scaling tips: This recipe can easily be doubled or tripled. Just ensure your grill has enough space for a single layer of broccolini for even cooking.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this Grilled Broccolini is completely customizable. You get to choose what seasonings you want to use:

  • Oil of your choice: Use an oil that has a smoke point that can withstand at least 400°F. Here are a few options: avocado oil (520°F, buttery flavor), grapeseed oil (420°F, neutral taste), olive oil (375-465°F, fruity flavor), and sunflower oil (450°F, light flavor).
  • Seasoning of your choice: Add a pinch of red pepper flakes for some heat. Use Italian seasoning or fresh herbs like thyme or rosemary. Opt for an all-purpose seasoning blend for a versatile and flavorful option.

Can I make it ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the broccolini ahead of time by tossing it with the oil and seasonings and storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a day. Grill it just before serving for the best flavor and texture.

Seasoned broccolini with garlic and red pepper flakes before grilling

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat, simply place the broccolini on a microwave-safe plate and heat for 30-60 seconds. You can also enjoy it cold in salads.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Grilled Broccolini 6
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Grilled Broccolini

This Grilled Broccolini is perfect for a quick, nutritious side dish for grilling. Have it alongside burgers and potatoes at summer BBQs or Father's Day. Plus, you get to customize this recipe with your favorite oil and seasonings.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 90kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 - 10-ounce bundle broccolini, ends trimmed
  • 2 tablespoons high heat oil of your choice (avocado oil, olive oil, grapeseed oil, or sunflower oil)
  • 2 tablespoons minced garlic (about 3 cloves)
  • Zest and juice of ½ lemon
  • 1 teaspoon spices of your choice (red pepper flakes, Italian seasoning, all purpose seasoning, everything bagel, za'atar seasoning, garlic powder, lemon pepper, etc.)
  • Salt and pepper, to taste
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat.
  • In a large bowl, toss the broccolini with the oil, garlic, lemon zest, lemon juice, and seasoning until evenly coated.
  • Place the broccolini on the grill in a single layer. Grill for about 10-12 minutes, turning occasionally, until tender and charred in spots.
  • Remove the broccolini from the grill and, if desired, squeeze a bit more lemon juice over the top for extra zest before serving.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 5.5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Potassium: 210mg | Fiber: 3.5g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1.1mg

save this grilled broccolini recipe on pinterest:

How to make grilled broccolini

try these other delicious sides too:

  • Accordion Sweet Potatoes
  • Greek Chopped Salad
  • Air Fryer Corn Fritters

Cottage Cheese Scrambled Eggs

May 21, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

If you're on the lookout for a quick and nourishing breakfast, then you're going to love this take on the viral Cottage Cheese Eggs. Simply blend together eggs, cottage cheese, and bagel seasoning for the creamiest scramble you've ever tasted. Plus, you get to customize this recipe and serve the scrambled eggs with your favorite base and toppings of your choice.

Cooked cottage cheese eggs on white plate with chives

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The American Egg Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What are the benefits of eggs?
    • Eggs for brain health
    • Eggs for muscle recovery
    • Eggs fit into a heart-healthy diet
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make Cottage Cheese Eggs
    • Blend the Base 
    • Cook in a skillet
    • Add Cheese
    • Serve
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this cottage cheese egg recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other egg recipes:

Why you'll love it

You might be thinking… cottage cheese and eggs together?! YES! Scrambled eggs with cottage cheese really gained popularity on TikTok over the last year. And I'll just tell you… there's a lot to love about this trend. 

  • Quick & Easy: These eggs are incredibly easy to whip up. With a total time of just 10 minutes, you can have a nutritious breakfast on the table in no time.
  • Super Creamy: The cottage cheese really elevates the eggs and gives them extra moisture and creaminess. Most videos for this trend mix the cottage cheese right into the eggs, but we prefer blending it for an overall smoother texture.
  • Crowd Pleaser: This recipe is perfect to serve at weekend brunch parties or simply one to meal prep and eat over the next few days. Plus, it uses budget-friendly ingredients so you don't have it break the bank.
Cottage cheese eggs with toast

Is cottage cheese nutritious?

Cottage cheese is known for its high protein content. It also provides nutrients like calcium, vitamin B12, and phosphorus, which help support bone health. One cup of cottage cheese provides 227mg of calcium and 0.924mcg of vitamin B12, which both provide about 17% and 39% of the Daily Value respectively.

What are the benefits of eggs?

A staple I always have as part of my daily routine is eggs. This small but mighty ingredient is a nutrient powerhouse. One large egg packs in 6 grams of complete protein alongside essential vitamins and minerals for healthy living. Here are some health benefits of eggs to keep in mind.

White and brown eggs in a bowl

Eggs for brain health

The choline in eggs helps support lifelong brain health at every age and stage, including memory, thinking, mood and more. Choline isn't found in high quantities in many foods. Luckily, eggs are one of the most concentrated food sources of choline in the American diet.

Eggs for muscle recovery

Eggs are considered a complete protein, meaning they contain all 9 essential amino acids (aka building blocks of proteins). Enjoying high-quality protein, like eggs, in combination with carbohydrates post-workout can help refuel our muscles and optimize recovery.

Looking for easy post-workout recipes? Try make-ahead breakfast burritos or these bite-sized egg veggie bites!

Eggs fit into a heart-healthy diet

Science is in alliance: Heart-healthy eating can include eggs, as supported by an abundance of research including a recent Harvard study evaluating up to 32 years of data.

People always ask about the cholesterol in eggs. However, for most people, cholesterol found in FOOD does not impact our BODY'S cholesterol levels like we once thought. Plus, the American Heart Association says eggs can be included as part of a heart-healthy diet for healthy adults.

Ingredients you'll need

  • Eggs: The foundation of any great scramble, providing high-quality, complete protein and essential nutrients.
  • Cottage cheese: Adds creaminess and boosts the protein content further, making your scrambled eggs even more filling. We typically prefer using low-fat varieties which contain 2% milk fat.
  • Bagel seasoning: This seasoning provides a delightful crunch and subtle salty flavor.
  • Avocado Oil: A touch of oil ensures your eggs are silky and rich. 
  • Cheese of your choice: Whether it's sharp cheddar or smooth mozzarella, pick your fave!
Ingredients needed for cottage cheese eggs

How to make Cottage Cheese Eggs

This recipe for cottage cheese scrambled eggs is simple and easy to make, let's break it down step-by-step.

Blend the Base 

Start by placing the eggs, cottage cheese, bagel seasoning, and black pepper in a blender. Blend for about 20 seconds until the mixture is smooth. You could also use a small food processor to get the job done.

If you're not feeling like blending, you could also whisk the cottage cheese and eggs together with the fork. Just know, the texture will be slightly thicker without blending.

Ingredients for cottage cheese eggs in blended
Ingredients for cottage cheese eggs fully blended in blender

Cook in a skillet

Heat the oil in a non-stick skillet over medium-low heat. Pour in the egg mixture, letting it sit for about a minute before gently stirring with a spatula.

Cottage cheese egg mixture being poured into hot skillet
Cottage cheese eggs being stirred in skillet with spatula

Add Cheese

Once the eggs begin to set but are still creamy, sprinkle your chosen cheese over the top. Let it melt slightly before removing from the heat.

Close up of fully cooked cottage cheese eggs with melted cheddar cheese on top

Serve

Dish out the scrambled eggs on your chosen base, adding any of the suggested toppings like diced tomatoes or sliced avocado for extra flavor and texture.

White plate with scrambled cottage cheese eggs with sliced avocado, sliced tomatoes, and sliced whole wheat bread

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Suggestions: You can eat these eggs solo but I recommend pairing with a base. I've found they pair beautifully with a slice of whole-grain toast or roasted potatoes. You can also pair the eggs with colorful vegetables like tomatoes or mini bell peppers. Eggs can help you better absorb the nutrients found in these vegetables too, like vitamin E and carotenoids!
  • Troubleshooting: If your eggs are taking a while to cook, you can always slightly bump up the heat to quicken the cook time.
  • Scaling Up: This recipe makes about 4 moderate servings but you can easily double or triple if you're hosting a brunch. Just make sure you have a large enough pan to fit everything.
Whole grain toast with scrambled eggs, sliced avocado and sliced tomatoes on top

Customize it your way

Like all of my recipes, these Cottage Cheese Eggs are completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese, bases, and toppings you want to use.

  • Toppings of your choice: Enhance your dish and boost the fiber with a variety of toppings such as diced tomatoes, diced bell peppers, caramelized mushrooms, finely chopped chives, or sliced avocado.
  • Shredded cheese of your choice: Choose from options like cheddar, mozzarella, pepper jack, or even a blend.
  • Base of your choice: Try out whole grain bread, a warmed tortilla, steamed sweet potatoes, or roasted potatoes to layer under your eggs.
Base options: cooked sweet potato, corn tortillas and whole grain toast
Nacho Bar 3

Can I make it ahead of time?

You can easily blend the mixture the night before to shave off a few minutes in the morning if you'd like. Simply store blended cottage cheese eggs in the fridge. Then, when you're ready to make them, heat your skillet and cook the eggs to creamy perfection.

How do I store leftovers?

Many people prefer scrambled eggs served fresh, but I've found this recipe is surprisingly good reheated. This likely has to do with the addition of cottage cheese, which keeps it moist. Store any leftover scrambled eggs in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Then, reheat in the microwave for 60-90 seconds to warm.

The USDA recommends cooking egg dishes to 160°F.

Cottage Cheese Scrambled Eggs 24

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Cottage Cheese Scrambled Eggs 13
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Cottage Cheese Eggs

This take on the viral Cottage Cheese Eggs, simply blends together eggs, cottage cheese, and bagel seasoning for the creamiest scramble you've ever tasted. Customize this recipe and serve the scrambled eggs with your favorite base and toppings of your choice.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast Choices
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 190kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 4 large eggs
  • ½ cup low fat cottage cheese
  • 2 teaspoons bagel seasoning
  • Freshly ground black pepper, to taste
  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil
  • ½ cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar, pepper jack, monterey jack, gouda, goat cheese, mozzarella cheese, mexican blend, etc.)

Base of your choice: (optional but recommended)

  • Whole grain bread, toasted
  • Tortilla
  • Croissant
  • Steamed sweet potato
  • Sweet potato "toast"
  • Roasted potatoes

Toppings of your choice: (optional but recommended)

  • Diced tomatoes
  • Diced bell peppers
  • Caramelized mushrooms
  • Finely chopped chives
  • Sliced avocado
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Place eggs, cottage cheese, bagel seasoning, and pepper in a blender or food processor and blend until smooth, about 20 seconds.
  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a non-stick skillet over medium-low heat. Pour over the egg mixture. Let sit for about 1 minute, then gently stir with a spatula. Cook for 3-5 minutes, stirring constantly, until the eggs are creamy and cooked to your liking.
  • Turn off heat and sprinkle over shredded cheese, then let sit for 2 minutes to melt slightly.
  • Serve scrambled eggs immediately with any desired base and toppings of your choice.

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Notes

Note: The USDA recommends cooking egg dishes to 160°F.
Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation does not include base or toppings. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 210mg | Sodium: 370mg | Potassium: 110mg | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 153mg | Iron: 0.6mg

save this cottage cheese egg recipe on pinterest:

Cottage Cheese Eggs

Want more? Try these other egg recipes:

  • Customizable Bistro Boxes
  • Air Fryer Egg Bites
  • Make Ahead Egg Burritos

Customizable Meal Prep Breakfast Burritos

May 20, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

Meal prep breakfast burritos are a delicious and convenient way to start your day. This recipe is filled with protein and veggies of your choice so you can customize with your personal favorites. Plus, you can easily make these burritos ahead of time and store them in the fridge or freezer to eat throughout the week. Cooking instructions included for microwave, air fryer, pan, panini press, and oven.

Make ahead healthy breakfast burritos

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why is meal prepping important?
    • Here are some other examples of meal prep recipes:
  • Are breakfast burritos healthy?
  • What tortilla should I use?
  • How do you make meal prep breakfast burritos?
    • 1. Cook protein of your choice
    • 2. Saute the veggies and eggs 
    • 3. Add ingredients over tortilla
    • How to roll burritos
  • Storing your meal prep burritos
  • Customize it your way
  • What should I serve with these burritos?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this make ahead breakfast burrito recipe on pinterest:
  • Try these other recipes with "protein of your choice"...

This post was first published on March 16, 2023. It was updated on May 20, 2024.

Why is meal prepping important?

These breakfast burritos are meal prep friendly, meaning you can make a large batch of them to have for different meals. Meal prepping is a great way to save time and reduce cooking stress with a busy schedule. 

When I work with clients in my Coaching + Cooking program, I typically recommend prepping a few meals and snacks over the weekend. Then, you'll have healthy items ready to go throughout the work week. 

These healthy breakfast burritos are always on my Sunday meal prep rotation. I love how you can make a bunch at one time. 

Meal Prep Breakfast Burrito next to cilantro lime sauce

Here are some other examples of meal prep recipes:

  • Strawberry Bliss Bites 
  • One Pot Chili
  • Egg Veggie Bites
  • Chicken Salad with Herbs
  • Rainbow Chickpea Edamame Salad

Are breakfast burritos healthy?

Yes! These meal prep breakfast burritos are filled with a healthy balance of satisfying protein, energizing carbs, and fiber-filled vegetables. 

If you're looking for ways to pump up the nutrients, you can always swap the regular tortilla for a whole grain tortilla or add extra veggies. 

What tortilla should I use?

I generally stick with a regular flour tortilla, but if you're looking for a lower calorie, lower carb option-here are a few good choices:

  • Hero Tortillas - 0g net carbs
  • Egglife Egg White Wraps - made from eggs so higher in protein
  • Siete Tortillas - gluten-free
Pan fried burrito

How do you make meal prep breakfast burritos?

This recipe makes 8 burritos total. If you are meal prepping for your family or wanting to make more, feel free to double the recipe. Here's how to make them.

1. Cook protein of your choice

Breakfast burritos often call for some type of meat like ground beef or sausage. You could also opt for a vegan option like plant based ground meat, tofu, or black beans. 

You'll want to thoroughly cook your crumbled protein in a pan. If using canned black beans, you can skip this step unless you want to warm them up.  

2. Saute the veggies and eggs 

Next, you get to add colorful veggies and scramble your eggs. I often like to use a combination of a few different kinds of veggies like tomatoes, peppers, and onion.

Then, pour over your whisked eggs. If you follow a vegan diet, you can also use a plant-based option like JUST egg!

3. Add ingredients over tortilla

It's super fun and helpful to get friends and family involved in this step. You can even create an assembly line where one person microwaves the tortilla, then one adds the scramble egg mixture, followed by another  one sprinkling on the cooked protein and cheese, and finally someone to roll the burritos and wrap in foil. 

How to make breakfast burrito
How to make breakfast burrito
How to make breakfast burrito

How to roll burritos

Rolling burritos takes practice. You can learn from this step-by-step guide or watch my video below in the recipe card!

Storing your meal prep burritos

Here are some helpful things to keep in mind when storing.

  • If you're going to eat your burritos the same week, simply store them in the fridge wrapped in foil or in a meal prep container. 
  • If you are freezing your burritos for later, be sure to label and date them. For example, sharpie onto the foil: "Tofu Breakfast Burritos - Froze March 6, 2023"
Make ahead breakfast burrito wrapped in foil

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this burrito recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein and veggies you want to use.

For the protein, feel free to use meat or a plant-based option. You could even omit it if you want an all egg burrito. Eggs are a good source of complete protein by themselves!

The veggie possibilities are really endless too. Here are some to try:

  • Sweet bell peppers
  • Tomatoes
  • Spinach, kale, or other dark leafy greens
  • Broccoli
  • White or yellow onions
  • Yellow squash
  • Zucchini
  • Mushrooms
  • Corn

How do I heat the burritos? 

In the recipe card below, I've included 5 options for cooking the burritos after assembly. 

For an extra crispy outside, I always recommend pan frying, air frying or grilling with a panini press. However, you can also microwave or bake in the oven too. 

Breakfast burrito cooked on a pan
Cooking burrito in pan
Air fryer breakfast burrito
Cooking burrito in air fryer
Panini breakfast burrito
Cooking burrito in panini press

What should I serve with these burritos?

You can't go wrong serving these burritos with an avocado crema, salsa, or light sour cream on the side. I also often like to pair this breakfast burrito with fresh fruit or a side salad. 

Eggs and beef in a burrito

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Make Ahead Breakfast Burrito
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Meal Prep Breakfast Burrito

Customize these meal prep burritos with your favorite protein and veggies. You can easily make these burritos ahead of time and store them in the fridge or freezer to eat throughout the week.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time30 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: breakfast burrito, make ahead, meal prep
Servings: 8 burritos
Calories: 420kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Flour Tortillas

Ingredients

  • Cooking spray
  • 1 pound protein of your choice (Beyond Steak, Beyond Sausage, bacon, turkey sausage, lean ground beef, crumbled tofu, 1 - 15 ounce can black beans, etc.)
  • 2 cups diced veggies of your choice (bell peppers, tomatoes, spinach, kale, broccoli, onions, zucchini, mushrooms, or corn, etc.)
  • 10 large eggs, whisked
  • Salt and pepper, to taste
  • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice, or more as needed (Mexican, Cheddar, Monterey Jack, Mozzarella, etc.)
  • 8 10-inch flour tortillas, burrito size
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

Cooking Instructions:

  • Heat a large skillet over medium heat. Spray pan with cooking spray then add protein of your choice. Cook protein over medium heat until cooked through, about 5 minutes.
  • Scoop protein into a large heat proof bowl and set aside for later.
  • If using meat, there may be some grease left in the pan you can use for cooking the veggies in the next step. If the pan is dry, add a bit of cooking spray. No need to clean the pan in between steps.
  • Add over veggies to the pan over medium heat and saute for 2-3 minutes. 
  • If the pan looks dry at this point, add a bit of cooking spray. Then, to the same pan over medium heat, pour over whisked eggs and season with salt and pepper, to taste. Scramble eggs with a spatula until they are fluffy and cooked through, about 3 minutes.
  • Turn heat off, then sprinkle shredded cheese evenly over eggs. Let melt slightly for about 2 minutes.

Assembly Instructions:

  • To make tortillas more pliable and less likely to break when rolling, microwave for 15-30 seconds before adding egg mixture. 
  • Divide cheesy egg mixture and cooked protein evenly among your 8 tortillas. There should be about roughly ¾ cup of fillings per tortilla.
  • Roll into a burrito and wrap in foil until ready to eat. (Watch the video below to see how to fold burritos.)
  • Store burritos in the fridge for up to 1 week or freezer for up to 3 months. If freezing, be sure to thaw burritos in the fridge the day before cooking. 

Heating Burrito Instructions:

  • Skillet (recommended): Remove burrito from foil. Heat skillet to medium high heat and spray with cooking spray. Add over burrito (seam side down) and pan fry for 2-3 minutes each side.
  • Air Fryer (recommended): Remove burrito from foil and lightly spray both sides with cooking spray. Add burrito to air fryer basket (seam side down) and cook at 350ºF for 6-8 mins until crispy.
  • Panini Press (recommended): Remove burrito from foil and lightly spray both sides with cooking spray. Add burrito to a preheated panini press and grill for 3-4 minutes until crispy and warmed through.
  • Microwave: Remove foil from burrito and cover in a damp paper towel. Microwave for 1-2 minutes to reheat.
  • Oven or Toaster Oven: Leave burrito in foil and heat in oven at 350ºF for 10-15 minutes until heated through.

Video

Notes

Protein: If using 1 - 15 ounce can black beans, you can skip step 1 since they don't need to be cooked. 
Veggies: If you want you add regular potatoes or sweet potatoes into the veggies portion, ensure they are cubed and pre-cooked. We are only sauteing the veggies for a few minutes so it wouldn’t cook the potatoes all the way through. 
Eggs: If you want creamier scrambled eggs, stir ¼ milk into the mixture when whisking. If you follow a vegan diet or don’t eat eggs, you can also use a plant-based option like JUST egg!
Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for black beans, red peppers, and mexican blend cheese. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1burrito | Calories: 420kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 250mg | Sodium: 900mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g

save this make ahead breakfast burrito recipe on pinterest:

Meal Prep Breakfast Burrito - save on Pinterest!

Try these other recipes with "protein of your choice"...

  • Nacho Bar
  • One Pan Curry
  • Power Bowls

Greek Chopped Salad

April 22, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

Looking for a nutritious yet simple recipe to meal prep for lunch or dinner? This Greek Chopped Salad is ideal as it makes several servings and it's super healthy. It's brimming with colorful veggies like cucumber, tomato, and red onion. Plus, you get to choose any base and protein of your choice to add to it!

Greek chopped salad in white bowl

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Ingredients you'll need
  • How to make it
    • Prepare the vegetables
    • Combine in a bowl
    • Make the vinaigrette
    • Dress the salad
    • Chill and serve
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this greek chopped salad recipe on pinterest:
  • try these recipes too:

Why you'll love it

This salad screams summer to me. It offers a refreshing combination of crisp vegetables and creamy feta cheese, all tied together by a zesty vinaigrette. It's a nutritious choice that's customizable, making it suitable for pretty much any dietary preference. It's quick and nutritious-need I say more? 🙂

Is it healthy?

This salad is not only low in calories but also high in dietary fiber and vitamins from its variety of vegetables. We recommend including the protein to make it a balanced meal that can support muscle repair and energy levels throughout the day.

Greek chopped salad in white bowl

Ingredients you'll need

Here's what you'll need to make this vibrant salad:

  • Bell pepper: Choose any color to add crunch and sweetness.
  • English cucumber: Its mild flavor complements the stronger tastes in the salad.
  • Heirloom tomato: Adds a burst of juiciness.
  • Red onion: Brings a slight zip that contrasts nicely with the other ingredients.
  • Feta cheese: We sure to grab pre-crumbled feta or you can crumble up a feta block yourself.
  • Base options: Leafy greens, pasta, or quinoa to bulk up the salad.
  • Protein options: Chicken, chickpeas, salmon, or pistachios for extra protein and nutrition.
A red, orange, and yellow bell pepper

How to make it

Follow these steps to assemble your Greek chopped salad.

Prepare the vegetables

Start by dicing the bell pepper, cucumber, tomato, and red onion into uniform ¼-inch pieces. This ensures that each bite has a balanced flavor and texture, which is essential for a chopped salad. I often like to use my veggie chopper to get the job done in no time!

Chopped peppers, onion, cucumber, tomato, and feta cheese in separate bowls

Combine in a bowl

Transfer the chopped vegetables to a large salad bowl. Add the feta cheese, along with your choice of base and protein. Toss everything together thoroughly to ensure that the flavors are well-distributed throughout the salad.

Make the vinaigrette

In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together all dressing ingredients. To save time, feel free to grab a Greek vinaigrette from the store. We often enjoy using Primal Kitchen's Greek Vinaigrette.

Mixed salad dressing in a mason jar

Dress the salad

Pour about half of the vinaigrette over the salad-roughly ¼ cup-and toss to coat evenly. You can always add more if you like a dressing-heavy salad.

Pouring the salad dressing over the salad

Chill and serve

For the best flavor, let the salad chill in the refrigerator for about an hour before serving. This allows the flavors to meld together beautifully. If you're in a hurry, you can serve it immediately-either way, it'll be delicious!

Greek chopped salad in white bowl on blue and white linen

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving suggestions: This salad really stands on its own but if you're craving more, feel free to pair it with crusty bread or hummus and pita chips on the side.
  • Troubleshooting: If the salad seems dry, add a bit more vinaigrette just before serving.
  • Scaling: This recipe is easily halved for smaller meals or can be doubled for gatherings.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this Greek chopped salad is completely customizable. You get to choose which proteins and base ingredients you want to use. Here are some options:

  • Base choices: Mixed greens or romaine for a lighter option, pasta for a heartier dish, or quinoa for a gluten-free alternative.
  • Protein variations: Grilled chicken for a classic touch, chickpeas for a vegan source, or flaked cooked salmon for extra omega-3s.
Cooked pasta, cooked quinoa, and lettuce next to each other.
Chickpeas, chopped chicken, and pistachios in separate bowls.

Can I make it ahead of time?

Absolutely! As a dietitian, this chopped Greek salad is one I recommend as a meal prep option to my clients all the time. Assemble the salad as the directions call for and then store in a large container or split up into individual meal prep containers. Feel free to add extra vinaigrette just before serving. You can always add the dressing into separate small condiment containers too.

Greek chopped salad separated into four meal prep containers.

How do I store leftovers?

Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. The flavors will continue to enhance, making it even more delicious the next day.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Greek Chopped Salad 11
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Greek Chopped Salad

This Greek Chopped Salad is ideal for meal prep, lunch, or dinner as it makes several servings and it's super healthy. Plus, you get to choose any base and protein of your choice to add to it!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Course: Main Course, meal prep
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 310kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Veggie Chopper
  • Mini Dressing Containers

Ingredients

Salad Ingredients:

  • 1 large bell pepper of your choice, diced into ¼-inch pieces (makes about 1 heaping cup) - yellow, red, orange, or green bell pepper
  • ½ large English cucumber, diced into ¼-inch pieces (makes about 1 heaping cup)
  • 1 medium heirloom tomato, diced into ¼-inch pieces (makes about 1 cup)
  • ¼ small red onion, diced into ¼-inch pieces (makes about ¼ cup)
  • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese
  • 2 cups base of your choice (Choose either cooked pasta, cooked quinoa, or chopped leafy greens such as romaine lettuce - optional but recommended)
  • Protein of your choice (Choose either 1 cup cooked and chopped chicken breast, 1 cup drained and rinsed canned chickpeas, ½ cup cooked and flaked salmon or smoked salmon, 5 ounce can tuna, or ½ cup shelled pistachios - optional but recommended)

Vinaigrette Ingredients: Makes ½ cup

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
  • 2 teaspoons dijon mustard
  • 2 teaspoons garlic
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • Salt and pepper, to taste
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Using a knife or a veggie chopper tool, dice the bell pepper, cucumber, tomato, and red onion into uniform ¼-inch pieces.
  • Add veggies to a large salad bowl then toss with feta cheese. Add base of your choice and protein of your choice and toss to combine.
  • In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together all vinaigrette ingredients.
  • If enjoying the salad right away: Pour half the vinaigrette (¼ cup) over the salad and toss to evenly coat. Set aside the remaining vinaigrette to serve with the salad.
    If enjoying the salad later on: Portion vinaigrette into 4 small containers to serve with the salad.
  • Feel free to enjoy immediately, or portion the salad into 4 meal prep containers along with the mini dressing containers.
  • Store leftovers or prepped salads for 3-4 days in the fridge.

Notes

Pasta Note: If you are using 2 cups of cooked pasta, you'll need to cook about 1 cup of dry pasta to achieve this amount. You can also use up leftover cooked pasta.
Vinaigrette Note: To save time, feel free to grab a Greek vinaigrette from the store! We often enjoy using Primal Kitchen’s Greek Vinaigrette.
Nutrition Note: Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for chicken and leafy greens used. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 379mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 1.7mg

save this greek chopped salad recipe on pinterest:

Pinterest Mackenzie will do 1

try these recipes too:

  • Chickpea Edamame Salad
  • Fruit and Nut Salad with Homemade Vinaigrette

One Pan Stuffed Pepper Skillet

April 17, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

This One Pan Stuffed Pepper Skillet recipe is perfect for busy weeknights. It's a hearty, comforting meal that includes a variety of fresh vegetables and plant-based protein. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite cheese-dairy or vegan!

Stuffed Pepper Skillet 6

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Beyond Meat. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make this stuffed pepper skillet
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make these deconstructed stuffed peppers ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this Deconstructed Stuffed Pepper Skillet recipe on pinterest:
    • try these Beyond recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    This skillet is like a deconstructed version of stuffed peppers... yum! Plus, who doesn't love a quick, tasty dinner that only dirties one pan? Here are a few reasons why this one pan recipe will become a new favorite in your home:

    • Quick and Easy: With a total time of under 1 hour and only needing one pan, this dish is about as effortless as it gets for a wholesome dinner.
    • Flavorful and Nutritious: Combining bell peppers, tomatoes, and savory spices, you get a meal that's bursting with flavor and vitamins.
    • Customizable: Whether you're a cheese lover or prefer it dairy-free, this skillet can adapt to your taste and dietary needs.
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 12

    Is Beyond Beef healthy?

    Let's talk about the star of this recipe! Beyond Meat just launched Beyond IV, the fourth generation of their Beyond Burger and Beyond Beef, where they've swapped coconut and canola oils for avocado oil, providing heart-healthy monounsaturated fats. This new version also reduced the sodium by 20% and brought down the saturated fat by 60%, bringing it to just 2 grams of saturated fat per serving. Finally, they've boosted the protein to 21 grams per serving derived from nutrient-dense sources like peas, brown rice, red lentils and faba beans. 

    You can find Beyond IV in the meat section of your local grocery store! Just look for the new gold label - you can't miss it.

    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 1
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 2

    Ingredients you'll need

    Here are the main ingredients you'll need for this recipe, along with a few tips:

    • Bell Peppers: Choose any color pepper you have on hand or can find at your store. I sometimes even do a mixture of 1 red bell pepper and 1 yellow bell pepper. 
    • Beyond Beef: This plant-based meat alternative is perfect for adding protein. It's juicy, delicious, and nutritious. Dietitian approved!
    • Tomatoes: These add moisture and flavor to the skillet. Opt for no-salt-added varieties to control the sodium.
    • Cheese: Whether you choose cheddar, mozzarella, or a vegan option, cheese adds a creamy texture and rich flavor.
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet

    How to make this stuffed pepper skillet

    Follow these simple steps to create your skillet:

    1. Sauté Vegetables: Cook the onion and garlic in olive oil until translucent, then add the bell peppers.
    2. Brown the Meat: Add the Beyond Beef and break it up as it cooks.
    3. Combine and Cook: Stir in the rest of the ingredients then simmer until the rice is tender.
    4. Melt Cheese: Sprinkle your chosen cheese over the cooked mixture, cover to melt, and then garnish with fresh herbs.
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 3
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 4

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Serve with a side salad or some crusty bread to soak up the delicious sauce.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the rice isn't fully cooked by the time the liquid is absorbed, add a little more broth or water and continue to cook until tender. Be sure to follow the cooking time on the back of your rice.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe easily doubles to feed a crowd. In this case, just use a large pot instead of a saute pan.
    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 10

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my recipes, this Stuffed Pepper Skillet is completely customizable. Choose the type of bell peppers and cheese you want to use

    Greek Chopped Salad 1
    Nacho Bar 3

    Can I make these deconstructed stuffed peppers ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Prepare the skillet up to the point of adding cheese, then cool and refrigerate. Reheat in the skillet, add cheese, and serve.

    How do I store leftovers?

    This dish is perfect to enjoy as meal prep leftovers. Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 5 days in the fridge or in the freezer for up to 3 months. It reheats well in the microwave.

    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 13

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Stuffed Pepper Skillet 6
    Print Recipe
    5 from 4 votes

    One Pan Stuffed Pepper Skillet

    This One Pan Stuffed Pepper Skillet recipe is perfect for busy weeknights or meal prep!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 6 servings
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Saute Pan

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ medium onion, diced (about ¾ cup)
    • 1 tablespoon garlic, minced
    • 1 pound Beyond Beef plant-based ground
    • 2 medium bell peppers of your choice (yellow, red, orange, or green) - chopped into ½ inch pieces (about 2 heaping cups)
    • 1 - 14.5 ounce can no salt added diced tomatoes
    • 1 - 8 ounce can no salt added tomato sauce
    • 1 cup uncooked long grain white rice
    • 2 cups low sodium vegetable broth or water
    • 2 teaspoons Italian seasoning
    • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
    • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
    • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice (Feel free to choose a vegan option if you'd like. We love using cheddar cheese but you could also use pepper jack, monterey jack, gouda, mozzarella cheese, italian five cheese blend, or mexican blend.)
    • ½ cup fresh parsley or cilantro, roughly chopped
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Heat the olive oil in a medium pot or large saute pan (with tight fitting lid) over medium heat. Add the diced onion and sauté until translucent, about 5 minutes. Add the minced garlic and cook for another minute until fragrant.
    • Add the Beyond Beef to the skillet. Break it up with a spatula and cook until it's browned, stirring occasionally for about 6-8 minutes.
    • Stir in the diced bell peppers, diced tomatoes (undrained), tomato sauce, rice, vegetable broth or water, Italian seasoning, smoked paprika, and red pepper flakes. Stir gently to combine all the ingredients.
    • Bring the mixture to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium low to bring it to a simmer. Cover the pot or pan with a lid and let it cook for about 20 minutes, or according to the rice package instructions.
    • Remove from the heat, then give it a good stir. Sprinkle cheese on top of the cooked mixture, cover with a lid again, and let the cheese melt for 3-5 minutes.
    • Garnish with chopped parsley or cilantro before serving.

    Video

    View this post on Instagram

    A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

    save this Deconstructed Stuffed Pepper Skillet recipe on pinterest:

    deconstructed stuffed peppers

    try these Beyond recipes too:

    • Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza
    • Spicy Avocado Burger

    Pea Pasta with Parmesan

    April 12, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Pea Pasta with Parmesan perfectly combines vibrant peas with the flavors of pesto, creating a refreshing spring pasta dish. Plus, you get to choose your favorite type of pasta for the base. Try chickpea pasta, protein pasta, or even lentil pasta for a nutritional boost - the choice is yours!

    Pea Pasta Libbys 19

    Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are canned peas healthy?
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make it
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this pea pasta with parmesan recipe on pinterest:
    • try these recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    This pasta with peas, parmesan, and pine nuts is a balanced dish made with minimal effort or prep work. Here's why you'll have it on repeat this spring.

    • Pasta Choices: Since we aren't using a traditional protein source such as meat, we recommend using a protein-rich pasta like Banza or Protein+ to give this an extra protein boost.
    • Aromatic and Light: The combination of fresh basil, lemon, and garlic creates this symphony of flavors that's super refreshing.
    • Visually Stunning: With its bright green hue, this pasta not only tastes good but also looks beautiful on your plate.
    Pea Pasta Libbys 7

    Is pea pasta healthy?

    Absolutely! Let's break down the health benefits:

    • Protein pasta: By choosing a chickpea or protein pasta, you're getting an extra boost of protein and fiber-two nutrients that keep you fuller longer and promote muscle recovery.
    • Olive oil and pine nuts: The monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fats in olive oil and pine nuts are beneficial for overall heart health.
    • Canned peas: These little green gems are a fantastic source of vitamins, minerals, and fiber.

    Are canned peas healthy?

    Absolutely - canned peas add a bit of protein, fiber, and calcium to our bowls. They have a tender, succulent and creamy taste that you know and love.

    Libby's Sweet Peas are grown by American farmers and packed right here in the USA. What's inside the can? Just peas, water, and a touch of sugar and sea salt for flavor!

    Pea Pasta Libbys 9

    Ingredients you'll need

    • Pasta: Our base for the recipe that's extra satisfying.
    • Pine Nuts: If you can't find pine nuts, you can skip them or swap for sliced almonds or savory glazed walnuts.
    • Garlic & Basil: These aromatic ingredients are simple but super flavorful.
    • Sweet Peas: The star of the show, adding a sweet, fresh burst that perfectly complements the other ingredients.
    • Lemon Juice: Brightens the dish with a touch of acidity.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Brings an element of salty and umami.
    Ingredients: basil, red pepper flakes, garlic, pepper, sweet peas, pasta, lemon, parmesan, pine nuts

    How to make it

    1. Cook the Pasta: Boil your pasta to al dente, leaving it with a slight bit of chewiness.
    2. Toast the Pine Nuts: Keep a careful eye on the nuts as they can go from toasted to burnt real quick!
    3. Blend the Sauce: This green sauce is where your pasta really comes to life. There's not much prep work involved thanks to the canned peas.
    4. Combine and Garnish: Fold the pasta into your vibrant pea sauce, then garnish with  fresh basil and Parmesan cheese.
    Pine nuts toasting in a pan
    Peas cooking in pan with garlic
    Sauce being blended up
    Homemade pea pasta sauce
    Healthy pea pasta with parmesan and basil

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Suggestions: Pair with crusty bread or a simple arugula salad dressed with olive oil and lemon juice to round the meal out.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your sauce is too thick, you can add a touch more water to reach your desired consistency.
    • Scaling Tips: Easily double this recipe to feed a crowd or for meal prep.
    Easy pea pasta dish with lemon, basil and peas in background.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my recipes, this Pea Pasta is completely customizable. Choose your preferred type of pasta and shape.

    • Pasta of your choice: We prefer chickpea pasta, but you can use protein plus pasta, lentil pasta, or regular pasta! As far as shape goes, common ones to choose from are cavatappi, spirals, penne, or spaghetti. If you are buying a 16-ounce box of pasta, be sure to only cook half of the box for this recipe.
    Plain pasta noodles

    How do I store leftovers?

    Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat in the microwave, adding a touch of oil on top to refresh the pasta if needed.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Pea Pasta Libbys 14
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Pea Pasta with Parmesan

    This Pea Pasta perfectly combines vibrant peas with the flavors of pesto, creating a refreshing spring pasta dish. Customize with your favorite type of pasta for the base, like chickpea pasta, protein pasta, or even lentil pasta - the choice is yours!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Main Course
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 4 servings
    Calories: 400kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces pasta of your choice
    • ¼ cup pine nuts
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 5 large cloves garlic, sliced
    • 1 15-oz. can of Libby's Sweet Peas, drained
    • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice, about 1 large lemon, squeezed
    • ¼ cup packed fresh basil leaves, plus more for garnish
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta according to package instructions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of the pasta water before draining the pasta. Rinse the pasta under cold water then add back into the pot and set aside.
    • Place pine nuts in a large, dry skillet (no oil) over medium heat. Toast them, stirring frequently until golden and fragrant, about 2-3 minutes. Transfer to a bowl and set aside for garnish.
    • In the same pan, add oil over medium low heat. Add sliced garlic and sauté until fragrant and slightly browned, about 2-3 minutes.
    • To the same pan, add sweet peas, reserving 3 tablespoons of peas for garnishing the pasta at the end. Sauté peas for 2 minutes, then remove from heat and carefully transfer everything to a blender. Add to the blender lemon juice, basil, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and pasta water. Blend until smooth.
    • Gently fold the pea sauce into the cooked pasta and stir to combine.
    • Garnish with toasted pine nuts, sweet peas, grated parmesan cheese, and more fresh basil leaves.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 400kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 570mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 11g | Calcium: 123mg | Iron: 8mg

    save this pea pasta with parmesan recipe on pinterest:

    Pea Pasta with Parmesan and Pine Nuts

    try these recipes too:

    • Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots
    • Pistachio Pesto

    Your Guide to Probiotics vs Prebiotics

    April 10, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 1 Comment

    In the complex world of gut health, here's the quick facts on probiotics vs prebiotics. Probiotics are the beneficial bacteria that live in the gut while prebiotics act as their fuel, promoting a balanced gut environment. Read on to learn about how probiotics help your body and what foods are good sources of probiotics vs prebiotics. 

    Fermented foods in different size jars

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Maddy Kachelmuss.)

    Table of Contents

    • What are probiotics vs prebiotics?
    • How do probiotics support the body?
      • Probiotics and mental health
    • What are the different probiotic strains?
    • What does an unbalanced gut look like?
    • Probiotic Food Sources
      • Kimchi
      • Yogurt
      • Tempeh
      • Sauerkraut 
      • Kombucha or Kefir
    • Prebiotic Food Sources
      • Legumes
      • Nuts and Seeds
      • Vegetables
      • Fruits
      • Whole grains
    • Why getting a variety matters
      • Probiotic + prebiotic pairings to try:
    • Considering supplements
    • How can I find out the make-up of probiotics in my gut?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    What are probiotics vs prebiotics?

    • Probiotics: Live microorganisms (aka good bacteria) that support a healthy gut and body
    • Prebiotics: Food for the probiotics, helping the probiotics grow.

    Together they contribute to the gut microbiome (aka the gut flora) which refers to all of the bacteria that live in the gastrointestinal (GI) tract. This microbiome is home to over 4,000 species of bacteria! This adds up to over a trillion microorganisms which work together to maintain a balanced environment.

    The composition of the probiotics residing in the gut is super individualized. It's shaped by each person's unique daily habits and lifestyle choices. This means factors like what you eat, drink, the medicines you take, and physical activity matter.

    Probiotics vs prebiotics food sources
    Probiotics vs prebiotics food sources

    How do probiotics support the body?

    A balanced and diverse microbiome supports your body in many ways. Common functions probiotics help carry out include:

    • Digestion 
    • Convert food to energy
    • Support immune system
    • Fight off infections
    • Makes vitamins 

    By fulfilling these vital functions, probiotics contribute significantly to overall well-being and resilience of the body.  

    Probiotics and mental health

    The gut microbiome impacts not only your physical health, but your mental health as well. There is something called the gut-brain-axis, where the gut and brain can communicate with one another sending signals back and forth.

    There are neurons that line our gut, and recent research suggests these neurons may help to regulate our mood and may help improve symptoms of depression and anxiety. However, more research and larger long-term studies are needed to apply these findings to everyone. 

    What are the different probiotic strains?

    A probiotic "strain" refers to a specific type of bacteria or yeast. These different strains can have various effects on the body, but all strains promote gut health. Some of the most common strains that you might see on nutrition labels or in research are:

    • Lactobacillus 
    • Bifidobacterium 
    • Saccharomyces

    While there are more strains beyond those listed, becoming familiar with these common ones can provide a foundation for understanding these vast microbial communities that help support all of us.

    What does an unbalanced gut look like?

    An unbalanced gut can manifest in various ways, not only affecting digestion but overall well-being. Around 40% of people worldwide have some type of gastrointestinal disorder.  Studies reveal that an imbalanced gut microbiome, also known as dysbiosis, correlates with numerous health issues. 

    Women sitting with arms wrapped around knees

    What we eat plays a crucial role in the gut environment. Diets high in sugar and low in fiber tend to exacerbate gut dysbiosis. Additionally, lifestyle factors such as medication usage like antibiotics, exercise levels, and bowel movement frequency can influence gut health.

    The repercussions of an unbalanced gut extend beyond digestive discomfort, with links to conditions like:

    • Type 2 diabetes
    • Heart disease
    • Obesity
    • Mental health disorders
    • Dementia

    Okay, that's the bad news. Now the good news: Recognizing the impact of consuming foods for a healthy gut may be key towards improving your overall well-being. Let's discuss some foods that you might want to start with.

    Probiotic Food Sources

    Probiotics are present in a variety of fermented foods. The fermentation process is really facilitated by microorganisms like bacteria, yeast, and mold. These tiny organisms play a key role in breaking down the components of food, leading to the development of unique flavors, textures, and nutritional profiles. 

    Here are some common probiotic-rich foods to try: 

    Kimchi

    Kimchi is a traditional Korean fermented vegetable, typically cabbage, with added seasonings. 

    • How to use it: It can be enjoyed as a side or incorporated into other dishes like rice, noodles, eggs, and dumplings.
    • Health benefits: Recent research suggests that kimchi consumption may offer protective effects against cancer and obesity.

    Yogurt

    Yogurt is a dairy product made by fermenting milk with live bacterial cultures. 

    • How to use it: It can be eaten plain, layered into a mason jar parfait, blended into smoothie bowls, or used as a base for a dip.
    • Health benefits: Many studies have shown that eating yogurt is associated with a reduced risk of certain cancers (breast/ colorectal) and type 2 diabetes. It has also been tied to better weight management and improved heart, bone, and gut health.
    Mixed berry parfait in a mason jar

    Tempeh

    Tempeh is a traditional Indonesian food made from fermented soybeans.

    • How to use it: It can be sliced, marinated, and used in various dishes like stir-frys, sandwiches, or salads.
    • Health benefits: Research suggests tempeh could aid in regulating blood sugar levels, promote heart health, lower blood pressure, and exhibit antidepressant effects. These studies around tempeh are limited, so more research is needed to confirm these findings.

    Sauerkraut 

    Sauerkraut is a tangy, fermented cabbage.

    • How to use it: It's commonly used as a condiment or side dish. Sauerkraut can be added to sandwiches, mixed into salads, or served alongside meats.
    • Health benefits: Eating sauerkraut has been shown to promote digestion, reduce cholesterol levels, and improve overall intestinal function.
    Sauerkraut in a wood bowl

    Kombucha or Kefir

    Kombucha is a fermented tea drink, while kefir is a fermented milk drink.

    • How to use it: Both can be consumed on their own as a beverage or used in sauces and dressings. 
    • Health benefits: Studies indicate that the probiotics found in kefir offer antimicrobial and anticancer properties, while also aiding in immune system regulation.

    Other fermented foods include some cheeses (cottage cheese, swiss, provolone, cheddar), pickles, miso, and sourdough bread. When choosing cottage cheese look for the words "live and active cultures" on the label to ensure it contains probiotics, as some varieties made with vinegar lack these beneficial strains. 

    Prebiotic Food Sources

    Prebiotic foods such as legumes, vegetables, fruits, nuts, seeds, and whole grains are rich in fiber. While fiber remains undigested by our GI tract, the probiotics in our gut are able to digest this fiber, aiding in their growth and supporting gut health. 

    These prebiotic foods not only promote gut health but emerging research suggests they may also support mood. Colorful vegetables, abundant in phytonutrients, contribute not just to physical health but may also play a vital role in fostering a positive mood and supporting brain health.

    Array of fruits, vegetables, and nuts

    Additionally, incorporating whole grains into a balanced diet has been linked to lower depressive symptoms and improved mood and anxiety scores. This highlights the importance of including a diverse array of food groups and fiber-rich foods into your daily intake. 

    Here's a few to consider starting with. This is the grams of fiber per cup.

    Legumes

    • Split peas (16 grams)
    • Lentils (15.5 grams) 
    • Black beans (15 grams)
    • Navy beans (13 grams)
    Five different kinds of legumes in white bowls

    Nuts and Seeds

    • Chia seeds (10 grams)
    • Almonds (3.5 grams)
    • Pistachios (3 grams)
    • Sunflower kernels (3 grams)

    Vegetables

    • Peas (9 grams)
    • Broccoli (5 grams)
    • Brussel sprouts (4.5 grams)
    • Potato (with skin) (4 grams)
    A variety of vegetables on table

    Fruits

    • Raspberries (8 grams)
    • Pear (5.5 grams)
    • Apple (with skin) (4.5 grams)
    • Banana (3 grams)

    Whole grains

    • Spaghetti, whole wheat (6 grams)
    • Barley (6 grams) 
    • Quinoa (5 grams)
    • Brown rice (3.5 grams)
    C49A3602

    Why getting a variety matters

    Different strains of probiotics are found in different food sources. That's why it's important to try and eat a variety of probiotic-rich foods as they support your body in different ways. Try pairing probiotic rich foods with prebiotic rich foods for a boost to your gut environment. 

    Probiotic + prebiotic pairings to try:

    • Greek yogurt (probiotic) + raspberries (prebiotic)
    • Kimchi (probiotic) + brown rice (prebiotic)
    • Tempeh (probiotic) + lentils (prebiotic)

    Considering supplements

    For individuals with dietary restrictions or signs of gut imbalance, supplements may be beneficial. Picky eaters or those experiencing digestive discomfort may find supplements a convenient solution to bridge those nutritional gaps. 

    Supplements can come in pills, powders, or even liquids that contain live beneficial bacteria. Each probiotic supplement contains different strains and amounts of probiotics. 

    Yellow pills spilling out of bottle

    For more information on choosing the right supplement for you, check out this guide from VeryWell. If you're looking for more, here are the top probiotic supplements of 2024, according to a dietitian.

    There's also this more in-depth probiotic guide that breaks down common probiotic supplements (such as Bio-K and GoodBelly) and their recommended uses.

    Like always, be sure to talk to your doctor or dietitian to help determine the best fit for you. 

    How can I find out the make-up of probiotics in my gut?

    If you're interested in what strains of probiotics that make up your unique gut microbiome, there are tests you can get done through your doctor, or at-home kits you can order online. It requires a stool sample that is analyzed for the different strains of these bacteria present. Exploring your gut microbiome through these tests can provide valuable insights to your digestive health and help inform personalized dietary and lifestyle choices for optimal well-being. 

    What are your favorite probiotic food sources? Let us know in the comments!

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Pre vs probiotics
    Maddy

    About the guest contributor:  Maddy is a dietetic student from Crystal Lake, Illinois currently pursuing a Master's degree at Illinois State University, with the goal of becoming a registered dietitian. With a passion for empowering others to live their best lives through nourishing meals and movement, Maddy believes in the transformative power of wholesome nutrition. Beyond her academic pursuits, she is a nomad at heart, currently embracing a life of adventure on the road in her tiny home. Always ready to explore the unknown and embrace change, she finds joy in the journey and values the present moment. Follow along with Maddy's adventures on Instagram and Youtube.

    Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots

    April 2, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Did you know you can air fry canned vegetables? These Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots prove that air frying canned vegetables can be extra delicious. This budget-friendly recipe is perfect for anyone looking for a healthy and easy-to-make side dish. Plus, you get to customize it with herbs of your choice like rosemary, thyme, or dill.

    Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots

    Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are canned vegetables healthy?
      • What's inside the can?
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make air fryer potatoes and carrots
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I prep this recipe ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this air fryer potatoes and carrots recipe on pinterest:
    • Try these veggie-filled air fryer recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    Air frying has truly revolutionized the way we cook. It offers a healthier way to help you achieve that extra crispy texture without all the oil from deep frying. For this recipe, we're relying on the air frying to provide the high heat needed to crisp up our canned potatoes and carrots. Here's a few reasons why you'll love it:

    • Quick and easy: With minimal prep time and a cooking process that's hands-off, this recipe is perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Versatile: Serve it as a side with your favorite protein, or toss it into a seasonal salad for some added crunch and flavor.
    • Customizable: Easily adjust the herbs to match your taste preferences or use up what you have growing in your own garden.
    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 8

    Perfect for springtime

    Spring is finally in the air, and this dish is the perfect way to celebrate. Try making these air fryer veggies to have in your next springtime feast.

    Are canned vegetables healthy?

    Absolutely! Both canned potatoes and carrots contain essential vitamins and minerals. Here, I'm using Libby's Vegetables which are US-grown, picked at the peak of ripeness and canned within hours to seal in the farm fresh goodness and flavor.

    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 9

    What's inside the can?

    Here's the high quality, fresh ingredients you'll see on the back of the can.

    • Libby's Sliced Potatoes: Just potatoes, water, a touch of sea salt, and calcium chloride as a firming agent. Potatoes are filled with energizing carbohydrates, potassium, and fiber.
    • Libby's Sliced Carrots: Just carrots, water, a touch of sea salt, and calcium chloride as a firming agent. Carrots are a great source of beta-carotene, vitamin K, and antioxidants.

    Canned potatoes and carrots are super versatile too. Try adding potatoes to creamy soups or sauté carrots into air fryer spring rolls.

    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 1

    Ingredients you'll need

    Here's what you'll need for these delicious air fryer potatoes and carrots:

    • Libby's Sliced Potatoes: Convenient and ready to use, no chopping needed.
    • Libby's Sliced Carrots: Add a sweet  flavor that pairs well with the potatoes.
    • Olive oil: To achieve that crispy texture without the heaviness of traditional frying.
    • Fresh herbs and garlic powder: To provide an aromatic flavor that compliments the potatoes and carrots.

    How to make air fryer potatoes and carrots

    Creating this dish is as simple as it gets:

    1. Dry your veggies: Drain the cans of potatoes and carrots and pat them dry to remove excess moisture. This step is crucial for achieving a crispy texture.
    2. Season: Toss them in olive oil, fresh herbs, garlic powder, black pepper, and salt.
    3. Air fry: Preheat your air fryer before adding the veggies - this step helps to start the cooking process with a hot environment, which is key for crispiness. Then, add the dried and seasoned potatoes and carrots and cook until golden and crispy.
    4. Serve: Enjoy warm with sauce or let them cool down to add to salads.
    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 3
    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 4

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: These potatoes and veggies go well with almost anything, but they're especially great with grilled proteins like chicken, fish, or steak. We also love serving the veggies with a sauce like ketchup, lemon herb yogurt sauce, or a garlic aioli.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your veggies aren't crisping up, make sure they're not overcrowded in the air fryer basket. Cooking in batches may be necessary if you have a small air fryer.
    • Scaling Tips: Keep in mind… the veggies will slightly shrink as you cook them, so it only makes about 2 generous servings. If you need a larger amount, you can easily double the recipe to create more servings. Again, just make sure you have the veggies in an even layer and cook in batches if needed to get that desired crispiness.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these air fried potatoes and carrots are completely customizable. You get to choose which fresh herbs you want to use. 

    • Herbs of your choice: We love using rosemary for this recipe, but you could also use fresh thyme, dill, or oregano. Yum!
    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 10

    Can I prep this recipe ahead of time?

    Yes! You can season the veggies and store them in the fridge for up to 24 hours until you're ready to air fry. 

    How do I store leftovers?

    These air fried veggies are really best enjoyed fresh, so wait to make them until right before you eat. If you do end up with leftovers, you can store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 11

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Air Fryer Potatoes Carrots Libbys 15
    Print Recipe
    Be the first to rate this recipe!

    Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots

    These Air Fryer Potatoes and Carrots prove that air frying canned vegetables can be extra delicious. Customize with herbs of your choice like rosemary, thyme, or dill.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 4 small servings
    Calories: 90kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Large Air Fryer

    Ingredients

    • 1 15-oz. can of Libby's Sliced Potatoes
    • 1 14.5-oz. can of Libby's Sliced Carrots
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 teaspoons fresh herbs of your choice finely chopped (rosemary, thyme, dill, or oregano)
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
    • Cooking spray
    • Optional: ½ small lemon, juiced
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Drain the cans of Sliced Potatoes and Sliced Carrots over a colander. Gently pat them dry with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel to remove the moisture. We also find it's helpful to let them sit out to air dry for 1 hour.
    • In a large bowl, add the drained potatoes and carrots and use a rubber spatula to very gently toss with olive oil, rosemary, garlic powder, salt, and black pepper until everything is evenly coated.
    • Preheat your air fryer to 400°F (205°C) for about 3 minutes. Once preheated, spray the basket with cooking spray and arrange the seasoned potatoes and carrots in a single layer.
    • Air fry for 17-20 minutes, or until potatoes and carrots are golden brown and crispy. Stir halfway through to promote even browning and crispiness.
    • Optional: After cooking, squeeze over the desired amount of lemon juice for a hit of bright flavor.

    Notes

    Sauce Note: These veggies are great served with a dipping sauce like ketchup, lemon herb yogurt sauce, or garlic aioli.
    Air Fryer Note: We tested this recipe using a 6 Quart Air Fryer. This size allows you to let the veggies spread out evenly and get nice and crispy. If you’re using a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook in batches to avoid overcrowding the basket.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 540mg | Potassium: 670mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1.4mg

    save this air fryer potatoes and carrots recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do

    Try these veggie-filled air fryer recipes:

    • Air Fryer Spring Rolls
    • Air Fried Chickpeas
    • Air Fryer Green Beans

    Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl

    March 29, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl is not only delicious but also loaded with nutrients to support your health. It's perfect for anyone looking for a quick, nourishing snack or a light breakfast with 20+ grams of protein. The combo of tangy lemon + sweet graham crackers gives it a cheesecake-like taste. Plus, you get to personalize it by mixing in any protein powder of your choice.

    Lemon blueberry yogurt bowl with gold spoon

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make it
    • Which graham crackers should I buy?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Protein yogurt bowl topping ideas
    • Can I make it ahead of time?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl recipe on pinterest:
    • Looking for more recipes with protein powder? Try these:

    Why you'll love it

    Every spoonful is a joy with this bowl. Here's why you'll find yourself making it over and over again:

    • Quick and easy: With a total prep time of just 5 minutes, it's perfect for busy professionals.
    • Protein-packed: Greek yogurt and vanilla protein powder give this recipe it's impressive protein content of 15 grams protein.
    • Fresh and flavorful: You may think lemon sounds weird in yogurt, but its fresh taste is perfect for springtime and beyond.
    • Versatile: Customize it with a sprinkle of lemon zest or adjust  the toppings to suit your taste. Feel free to add nuts, seeds, or granola for added texture and flavor.
    Close up of protein yogurt

    Is this protein yogurt bowl healthy?

    This protein-packed bowl is a powerhouse of nutrients:

    • Greek yogurt is rich in protein, supporting muscle repair and growth. It's also a rich source of probiotics, which are key to a healthy gut.
    • Vanilla protein powder not only adds a protein boost but also makes this bowl an excellent post-workout snack.
    • Lemons are high in vitamin C and antioxidants, supporting our immune health and skin health.
    • Blueberries are known for their antioxidant properties, which can protect your body from inflammation and oxidative stress.
    • Hemp hearts add a dose of healthy fats, fiber, and additional protein, making them a heart-healthy addition.
    Ingredients for Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl

    Ingredients you'll need

    • Greek yogurt: This is the base of your bowl. Go for vanilla for a sweet touch or plain for no added sugar.
    • Vanilla protein powder: Boosts the protein content and adds a hint of vanilla flavor.
    • Lemon juice: Adds a refreshing zest and a burst of vitamin C.
    • Blueberries: These little berries bring antioxidants and a natural sweetness.
    • Graham cracker squares: Provide a delightful crunch and texture to the bowl.
    • Hemp hearts: A superfood topping that enriches your bowl with omega-3 and protein.
    • Honey: Drizzle this atop for a touch of natural sweetness. Perfect for balancing the tartness of the lemon.
    • Optional lemon zest: For an extra lemony zing, don't hesitate to add some zest into your bowl.
    Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl with fresh blueberries and crunchy graham topping and honey

    How to make it

    1. Combine the base: In your favorite bowl, mix together the Greek yogurt, vanilla protein powder, and lemon juice until you achieve a smooth consistency.
    2. Add the toppings: Generously top it with blueberries, crushed graham crackers, hemp hearts, and a drizzle of honey. If you're feeling adventurous, sprinkle that optional lemon zest on top.
    3. Enjoy: Dive in immediately to enjoy this bowl at its freshest and most flavorful.

    Which graham crackers should I buy?

    When it comes to graham crackers, there's actually many options to choose from nowadays. As a dietitian, here's a few I enjoy:

    • Must Love Cookies: I had the chance to try these at Expo West and meet the founders. I love how they have zero added sugar - it's naturally sweetened from dates.
    • Partake Gluten-Free Grahams: If you have a gluten allergy or intolerance, these crackers may be a good option for you. They are delish and sometimes I even prefer them over regular grahams.
    • Simple Mills Sweet Thins: These are "squares" but you can still crush them up over your yogurt and they're delish! These are also gluten-free and grain-free. They have their honey cinnamon flavor but the lemon flavor is SO GOOD here!

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair this bowl with a cup of green tea or protein coffee for a refreshing breakfast or a mid-afternoon snack.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your bowl is too thick, a splash of almond milk can lighten it up. Too thin? Add more Greek yogurt to reach your desired consistency. Also, try using Seedless Lemons so you don't get any pesky seeds when juicing them.
    • Scaling Tips: You can easily double or triple the recipe for meal prep. Just keep the toppings separate until you're ready to enjoy so they don't get soggy.
    Seedless Lemons next to yogurt

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Protein Lemon Yogurt Bowl is completely customizable. You get to choose which protein powder you want to use. 

    • Vanilla protein powder of your choice: Choose one that fits your dietary preference. There are many options such as whey, pea, soy, rice, hemp, egg white, and more. You'll use about ½ scoop here which measures out to ~7 grams total.

    Protein yogurt bowl topping ideas

    You could also add different toppings to this bowl. Here's some ideas:

    • Feel free to swap blueberries for another berry of your choice like raspberries, strawberries, or blackberries.
    • Try using a different type of crunchy topping like granola or chopped nuts if you're not a fan of graham crackers.
    • For a vegan version, opt for plant-based yogurt and protein powder. You can also swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.
    • Don't have hemp hearts? Try adding a spoonful of chia seeds or flaxseeds instead for those healthy fats. 
    Side view of protein yogurt bowl with berries on top
    Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl with honey drizzle

    Can I make it ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Prepare the yogurt mixture in advance and store it in the fridge. Add the graham crackers just before serving to maintain their texture.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Protein Lemon Yogurt Bowl 12
    Print Recipe
    5 from 4 votes

    Protein Lemon Yogurt Bowl

    This Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl tastes like cheesecake and is perfect for a light breakfast. Customize with your favorite protein powder.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast
    Servings: 1 yogurt bowl
    Calories: 230kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • Heaping ½ cup (or a 5.3 ounce cup) vanilla or plain Greek yogurt
    • 1 tablespoon (~½ scoop) vanilla protein powder of your choice (whey, pea, soy, rice, hemp, egg white, etc.)
    • ½ lemon, juiced (about 1 tablespoon of lemon juice)
    • ¼ cup blueberries
    • 2 graham cracker squares, crushed into small pieces (about ¼ cup)
    • 1 teaspoon hemp hearts
    • 1 teaspoon honey
    • ¼ teaspoon lemon zest, optional
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Stir together the yogurt, protein powder, and lemon juice in a bowl until smooth.
    • Top it with blueberries, graham crackers, hemp hearts, a drizzle of honey, and optional lemon zest.

    Notes

    Blueberry Note: Feel free to swap blueberries for another berry of your choice such as raspberries, strawberries, or blackberries.
    Graham Cracker Note: When it comes to buying graham crackers, here's a few I enjoy:
      • Must Love Cookies: zero added sugar & naturally sweetened from dates
      • Partake Gluten-Free Grahams: gluten-free & allergen free brand
      • Simple Mills Sweet Thins: gluten-free and grain-free
     
    Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for whey protein powder. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1bowl | Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 150mg | Potassium: 370mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 1mg

    save this Lemon Blueberry Protein Yogurt Bowl recipe on pinterest:

    Save on Pinterest - Protein packed yogurt bowl for breakfast

    Looking for more recipes with protein powder? Try these:

    • Protein Coffee
    • Protein Mug Cake
    • Protein Cookie Dough
    • Salted Caramel Protein Balls
    • Lemon Blueberry Mug Cake

    Pomegranate Mocktail

    March 29, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Looking for a vibrant and refreshing non-alcoholic drink? Try this Pomegranate Mocktail that combines the tangy sweetness of pomegranate and orange juices with fizzy sparkling water.  Plus, this recipe can be personalized with your choice of sugar, sparkling water, and fresh herbs. 

    Pomegranate Mocktail 11

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make it
      • Prep the glass
      • Combine everything
      • Garnish and enjoy
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make it ahead of time?
      • Want more mocktails? Try these other drink recipes:
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this pomegranate mocktail recipe on pinterest:

    Why you'll love it

    This Pomegranate Mocktail is super refreshing with every sip. Here's why it will become your new favorite mocktail:

    • Flavorful: Tangy pomegranate juice + sweet orange juice is a match made in heaven, Think: mimosa vibes.
    • Healthy: Pomegranates are known for their health benefits, packed with antioxidants and vitamins. This mocktail offers a tasty way to enjoy these benefits.
    • Customizable: Whether you're a fan of rosemary, mint, thyme, or basil, you can choose  your favorite herbs to create a mocktail that's uniquely yours.
    • Easy to Make: With just a few easy steps, this mocktail will be ready to enjoy in no time.
    Pomegranate Mocktail 13

    Is it healthy?

    Absolutely!  Pomegranate juice is known for its rich antioxidant content, antimicrobial and anti-inflammatory properties which may help support overall well-being. It's paired with orange juice which is packed with vitamin C to support the immune system.

    Ingredients you'll need

    • Orange slice: Adds a citrusy aroma and flavor, and acts as  a colorful  garnish.
    • Sugar of your choice: Customize the sweetness to your liking, with options ranging from classic white sugar to coconut sugar or even a sugar-free alternative.
    • Sparkling water: There are tons of bubbly waters out there-feel free to use your favorite one.
    • Orange juice: You can squeeze fresh orange juice or save time and buy ready-to-go orange juice.
    • Pomegranate juice: The star of the recipe, offering a tart yet sweet flavor
    • Fresh herbs: Choose from rosemary, thyme, mint, or basil to add an aromatic element to the mocktail.
    Pomegranate Mocktail 1

    How to make it

    Prep the glass

    Line the rim of your cocktail glass with an orange slice, then dip in sugar to coat the rim beautifully.

    Pomegranate Mocktail 3
    Pomegranate Mocktail 4

    Combine everything

    Add ice to the glass, then pour over the sparkling water, orange juice, and pomegranate juice. Stir gently to combine.

    Pomegranate Mocktail 5
    Pomegranate Mocktail 6
    Pomegranate Mocktail 7

    Garnish and enjoy

    Add a sprig of your chosen herb and an orange slice for garnish. 

    Pomegranate Mocktail 12

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: This mocktail pairs wonderfully with light appetizers or brunch.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If you find your mocktail too tart , feel free to add in a spoonful of sugar or honey for added sweetness.
    • Scaling Tips: To make more than one mocktail, repeat the instructions as many times as you need. 
    Pomegranate Mocktail 15

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Pomegranate Mocktail is completely customizable. You get to choose which sugar, sparkling water, and herbs you want to use. Here are some ideas:

    • Sugar of your choice: White sugar or brown sugar work great. For a sugar-free version, try a stevia-based sweetener or  monk fruit.
    • Herbs of your choice: Rosemary, thyme, mint, or basil. 
    • Sparkling water of your choice: La Croix, Bubly, Spindrift, Waterloo, etc.
    Pomegranate Mocktail

    Can I make it ahead of time?

    It's best to make this drink fresh so it maintains its fizziness. 

    Want more mocktails? Try these other drink recipes:

    • Watermelon Mocktail 
    • Blueberry Lemonade 
    • Cinnamon Apple Cider Mocktail 
    Mocktails shown on the news

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Pomegranate Mocktail 12
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Pomegranate Mocktail

    A refreshing non-alcoholic Pomegranate Mocktail recipe. Customize with your choice of sugar, sparkling water, and fresh herbs.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Drink Choices
    Servings: 1 drink
    Calories: 100kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 1 orange slice, plus more for garnish
    • 1 teaspoon sugar of your choice (white sugar, brown sugar, coconut sugar, sugar-free alternative)
    • 1 cup ice
    • ¼ cup sparkling water of your choice (Use your favorite store bought flavor or try other brand names like La Croix, Bubly, Spindrift, Waterloo, etc.)
    • ¼ cup orange juice
    • ½ cup pomegranate juice
    • Fresh herbs of your choice (rosemary, thyme, mint, or basil)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Line rim of cocktail glass with orange slice then dip in sugar to coat rim.
    • Add ice then pour over sparkling water, orange juice, pomegranate juice and stir.
    • Garnish with herbs of your choice and orange slice.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 1g | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 21g

    save this pomegranate mocktail recipe on pinterest:

    Pomegranate infused mocktail - save on Pinterest to make for parties

    Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich

    March 27, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Looking to start your day with a tasty, hearty breakfast that's quick to make? This Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich is the perfect solution for those busy mornings when you're craving something quick and satisfying. Plus, you get to personalize it with any bagel, cheese, greens, and sauce of your choice.

    Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich stacked on a plate

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Veggies Made Great. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is this easy bagel breakfast sandwich healthy?
    • Are these egg patties healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make this healthy bagel sandwich?
      • 1. Toast the bagel
      • 2. Cook the egg patty
      • 3. Assemble the sandwich
      • 4. Finish it off with sauce
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make this sandwich ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this easy bagel sandwich recipe on pinterest:
    • try these breakfast recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    This balanced bagel breakfast is easy to make and loaded with nutrients to help you start your day off right. The combination of the crunchy toasted bagel filled with a savory egg patty, melted cheese, creamy avocado, fresh tomatoes, and crisp greens will have you coming back for more. Here's why you'll fall in love with this recipe:

    • Customizable: Choose from a variety of ingredients you likely already have in your fridge. This sandwich is all about making it your way.
    • Nutritious and satisfying: With a balance of protein, healthy fats, carbs, and fiber-it's a meal that will keep you fueled and satisfied all morning long.
    • Quick and easy: This bagel sandwich is ready in 10 minutes, perfect for those on-the-go mornings.
    Holding a nutritious morning meal of a seeded bagel sandwich with a perfectly cooked egg, slice of cheese, fresh tomato, and spinach.
    Bagel Breakfast Sandwich 26

    What is a bagel sandwich?

    Bagel sandwiches are often enjoyed for breakfast and feature sweet or savory fillings tucked between the halves of a toasted bagel.

    For us, it's a delicious trip down memory lane, reminding us of New York City's vibrant streets in the morning. Whether you're craving a bagel sandwich for nostalgia or flavor-get ready to enjoy it fully.

    A wholesome bagel sandwich with a bite taken on a ceramic plate, featuring a hearty egg, cheese, spinach, and tomato filling.

    Is this easy bagel breakfast sandwich healthy?

    Absolutely! This Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich is a great way to kickstart your day with a nutritious meal.

    While bagels are often criticized for their high carb content, they can actually be part of a healthy diet. Carbohydrates are essential for providing energy to both your body and brain. As a dietitian, I just recommend balancing it out with other elements like protein, healthy fats, and colorful veggies. This balance helps you feel fuller longer and promotes stable blood sugar levels.

    Here's a few other health highlights:

    • Avocado adds heart-healthy monounsaturated fats
    • Leafy Greens contribute fiber, vitamin C & K, and calcium
    • Egg Patties provide lean protein and extra veggies 
    Veggies Made Great egg patty
    Bagel cut in half to reveal layers

    Are these egg patties healthy?

    As a dietitian, I absolutely adore the Veggies Made Great line of products. They're motto is veggies come first and veggies are always their first ingredient… so cool!

    They make a variety of products like sweet muffins, savory frittatas, and these heat-and-eat egg patties. My favorite flavor is the Garden Vegetable Egg Patty! This patty features zucchini as the first ingredient alongside other veggies like tomatoes and carrots, providing a good dose of vitamins and minerals. Each patty has just 70 calories while packing in 6 grams of satisfying protein.

    You can find these patties in the frozen section at Target-check out the store locator to see where they are near you. They've also given me a unique offer for Buy One Get One Free product at all stores - YAY! Click here to use my link and stock up to have them ready for busy mornings! 

    Ingredients on white marble backdrop

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Bagel: Opt for your favorite type, whether it's plain, whole wheat, or everything, to serve as the base of your sandwich.
    • Vegetable Egg Patty: A tasty way to sneak in extra veggies and protein to your breakfast.
    • Cheese: Whether you prefer cheddar, Swiss, provolone, or another variety, cheese adds a creamy, melty layer.
    • Avocado: Mashed avocado provides creaminess and a dose of healthy fats.
    • Tomato: Fresh slices add a hint of sweetness and moisture.
    • Greens: Choose from spinach, arugula, sprouts, kale, or chard for a fresh, crunchy element.
    • Sauce: Customize your sandwich with a sauce that suits your mood, from spicy to ultra creamy.

    How do you make this healthy bagel sandwich?

    With this recipe, you'll whip up a nutritious breakfast sandwich in just 10 minutes. 

    Toasting bagel in air fryer

    1. Toast the bagel

    Achieve golden perfection by air frying at 350°F for 3-4 minutes or pop in a toaster.

    Cooking egg patty

    2. Cook the egg patty

    To cook your Garden Vegetable Egg Patty, follow the instructions on the box or website. You can either microwave, air fry, pop in the toaster, or bake in a toaster oven.

    Bagel assembly
    Bagel assembly - cheese
    Bagel assembly - egg
    Bagel assembly - avocado
    Bagel assembly - tomato
    Bagel assembly - greens

    3. Assemble the sandwich

    Layer over cheese, egg, avocado, tomatoes, and greens.

    Bagel assembly - sauce
    Topping bagel with other half

    4. Finish it off with sauce

    Finish it off with sauce by spreading your favorite condiment on the top half of the bagel, adding a final burst of flavor. Then, you can eat the bagel whole or cut it in half.

     hearty and healthy sandwich with a toasted multigrain bagel, filled with egg, cheese, fresh tomato, and spinach on a simple plate.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: This bagel sandwich is pretty filling on its own but you could always pair it with a side of fruit or a smoothie too.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your avocado is not ripe, place it in a paper bag with a banana overnight to speed up the ripening process.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe is easy to multiply for family breakfasts or meal prep. Just repeat the instructions to make as many bagels as you need.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this bagel sandwich is completely customizable. You get to choose what type of bagel, cheese, greens, and sauce you want to use.

    • Bagel of your choice: plain, whole wheat, everything, asiago, or sesame 
    • Cheese of your choice: cheddar, swiss, provolone, colby jack, or muenster
    • Greens of your choice: spinach, arugula, kale, sprouts, or chard
    • Sauce of your choice: hot sauce, mustard, whipped cream cheese, mayo, or chili crunch
    A breakfast setup with a halved, foil-wrapped bagel sandwich, next to a ripe, sliced avocado and a sprinkle of spinach leaves, on a rustic chopping board.

    Can you make this sandwich ahead of time?

    Absolutely, making this bagel sandwich ahead of time is a great idea for those busy mornings. If you're prepping in advance, skip toasting the bagel to avoid it becoming too hard when reheating.

    To make ahead of time: Simply assemble the sandwich with all your chosen ingredients, then wrap it tightly in foil and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. When you're ready to eat, heat in an air fryer or toaster oven for 4-5 minutes at 350ºF until warm and crispy.

    How do I store leftovers?

    This bagel is best enjoyed fresh. But if you end up with extras after toasting, store the bagel in the fridge then reheat by unwrapping the foil and air frying at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes.

    Close up this easy bagel breakfast sandwich assembled and wrapped in foil

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Bagel Breakfast Sandwich 15
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich

    This Easy Bagel Breakfast Sandwich is the perfect solution for those busy mornings when you're craving something quick and satisfying. Plus, you get to personalize it with any bagel, cheese, greens, and sauce of your choice.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 1 bagel sandwich
    Calories: 500kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Large Air Fryer

    Ingredients

    • 1 bagel of your choice (choose your favorite flavor such as everything, asiago, plain, or whole wheat)
    • 1 Veggies Made Great Garden Vegetable Egg Patty
    • 1 slice cheese of your choice (cheddar, swiss, provolone, colby jack, muenster, etc.)
    • ¼ medium ripe avocado, mashed (about 2 tablespoons)
    • 2 slices tomato
    • 1 large handful leafy greens of your choice (spinach, arugula, sprouts, kale, or chard)
    • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (whipped cream cheese, chili crunch, mayonnaise, mustard, or hot sauce)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Toast the bagel in an air fryer at 350°F (175°C) for 3-4 minutes or in a toaster until golden and crispy.
    • Cook the Egg Patty per the package instructions (either in the microwave, air fryer, toaster, or oven.)
    • On the bottom half of the toasted bagel, place a slice of cheese followed by the cooked Egg Patty.
    • Spread the mashed avocado over the Egg Patty, then layer over tomato slices and greens.
    • Spread your chosen condiment on the inside of the top half of the toasted bagel, then place over the greens and serve immediately.

    Meal Prep Instructions:

    • If enjoying the bagel sandwich later or to minimize mess, wrap the finished sandwich in foil or paper deli sheets and cut it down the center to achieve a deli-style presentation. This method helps keep the sandwich together and makes it easy to eat on the go.

    Video

    Notes

    Servings: Feel free to repeat as needed to make more bagel servings.
    Reheating: This bagel is best enjoyed fresh. But if you end up with extras or are meal prepping, store the bagel in the fridge then reheat by unwrapping the foil and air frying at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 500kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 700mg | Potassium: 390mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Calcium: 320mg | Iron: 2mg

    save this easy bagel sandwich recipe on pinterest:

    Easy bagel sandwich including egg patty, melted cheese, fresh tomato, avocado, and a handful of spinach.

    try these breakfast recipes too:

    • Chocolate Smoothie
    • Meal Prep Breakfast Burritos
    • Mushroom Egg Toast

    Pistachio Pesto

    March 26, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Pistachio Pesto is a flavorful, unique twist on your classic pesto which is traditionally made with pine nuts. This recipe is made with shelled pistachios, fresh basil, parmesan, and oil of your choice. Whether you're dressing pasta, topping toast, or searching for the ultimate dip-this pesto is sure to be your new go-to condiment.

    Vibrant green pistachio pesto recipe served in a white ceramic bowl.

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
      • Are pistachios healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How to make it
      • Blend ingredients 
      • Adjust consistency
      • Serve and enjoy
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
      • Base of your choice
    • Can I make it ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this pistachio pesto recipe on pinterest:
    • try these nut recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    • Innovative twist: Swapping pine nuts for pistachios offers a rich flavor while still providing a heart-healthy boost from the nuts.
    • Versatile: Perfect as a pasta sauce, a spread for toast, a dip for veggies and chips, a sauce for pizza or flatbread, or brushed over meat.
    • Quick and easy: With a prep time of just 5 minutes, this recipe is ideal for busy weeknights or springtime gatherings.
    Pistachio pesto toast on a slice of bread with sliced tomatoes.

    Is pesto healthy?

    Pesto is a condiment that's higher in fat and calories, but it's also loaded with health benefits. The star ingredients-fresh basil and pistachios-are rich in antioxidants and nutrients.

    For this recipe, you get to customize with your favorite oil. We typically recommend using avocado oil or extra virgin olive oil to maximize on the heart-healthy fats present.

    Here's a chart showing the breakdown of the fat makeup for each oil. Generally, it's best to stick with an oil with mostly mono and poly "unsaturated" fats.

    Are pistachios healthy?

    Recent research suggests that pistachios have several benefits such as supporting brain function, gut health, and may have positive impacts on skin and eye health. They can also be helpful for weight management and better blood sugar control. Much like dairy milk, eggs, and meat-pistachios are also considered a complete protein. This means pistachios contain all 9 essential amino acids our bodies need!

    Want to learn more about the health benefits of pistachios? Check out this great nutrition overview from American Pistachio Growers!

    Ingredients for pistachio pesto neatly arranged on a marble counter.

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Basil leaves: These greens offer a bright, herbal base for the pesto. Kitchen tip alert! Be sure to keep fresh basil at room temperature instead of the fridge. When basil gets too cold, it starts to go bad.
    • Pistachios: We recommend using roasted and salted pistachios. You can also use lightly salted versions for lower sodium. It's easiest to buy them pre-shelled so you don't have to crack a bunch of them.
    • Garlic cloves: For that punch of umami flavor every good pesto needs.
    • Parmesan cheese: Provides a savory, cheesy depth to the pesto.
    • Oil of your choice: Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil works wonders for the richness and consistency of the pesto.
    • Lemon juice: Adds a fresh, tangy kick that balances out the rich flavors.

    How to make it

    Blend ingredients 

    Combine basil, pistachios, garlic, Parmesan cheese, oil, lemon juice, and water in a food processor. Blend until smooth, about 1-2 minutes.

    Food processor with pesto blended

    Adjust consistency

    For a thicker dip, keep as is. To thin it out for pasta sauce, add more oil and blend again.

    Pesto surrounded by colorful bell peppers

    Serve and enjoy

    Pair with your favorite base-pasta, toast, or as a dip.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: If you're serving this pesto as a dip, display it in a beautiful bowl with fresh basil leaves and pistachios on top for presentation.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your pesto is still too thick after adding oil, you can gradually add a bit more water and blend until you reach the desired consistency.
    • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double or triple the recipe depending on how much you need. 
    Pesto pasta served in a white bowl

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Pistachio Pesto is completely customizable. You get to choose whichever oil and base you prefer.

    • Oil of your choice: Whether you're a fan of the rich taste of extra virgin olive oil or the lightness of avocado oil, this recipe adapts to your taste and preferences.

    Base of your choice

    You can also choose your favorite base to serve the pesto over. Pesto is best when paired with a delicious protein, carb, or veggie. like pesto toast, pesto pasta, salmon, steak, or even over a chicken salad.

    Base of your choice including veggies, toast, or pasta

    Can I make it ahead of time?

    Absolutely! This pesto is a great make-ahead option for meal prep. Just note: It thickens overnight, so you may need to stir in a bit more oil or water to thin it out.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Have extra pistachio pesto? Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 7 days in the fridge or up to 3 months in the freezer. We often add it into ice cubes trays or mini mason jars to freeze individual portions.

    Rustic table setting with jar of homemade pistachio pesto.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Pistachio Pesto 14
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Pistachio Pesto

    Pistachio Pesto is a flavorful, unique twist on your classic pesto which is traditionally made with pine nuts. Whether you're dressing pasta, topping toast, or searching for the ultimate dip-this pesto is sure to be your new go-to condiment.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Italian
    Servings: 8 servings (~2 tablespoons per serving)
    Calories: 235kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Food Processor

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups fresh basil leaves
    • 1 cup shelled pistachios, roasted and salted OR lightly salted
    • 2 garlic cloves, minced (about 2 teaspoons)
    • ½ cup shredded Parmesan cheese
    • ½ cup oil of your choice (extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil)
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice about juice of 1 lemon
    • 2 tablespoons water
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Base of your choice:

    • Cooked pasta
    • Multigrain bread, sliced and toasted
    • Veggies and pita chips, served as a dip
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a food processor, blend all ingredients until smooth. This should take about 1-2 minutes.
    • Adjust Consistency: At this point, you may notice you have a thicker pesto consistency. This is great to have as a dip. However, if you prefer a thinner pesto, add 2 to 3 more tablespoons of olive oil and blend again.
    • Serve the pesto with the base of your choice such as in pasta, over toast, or with veggies as a dip.
    • Store leftover pesto in a jar in the fridge for up to 7 days or the freezer for up to 3 months.

    Video

    View this post on Instagram

    A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoons | Calories: 235kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 117mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 100mg | Iron: 1.1mg

    save this pistachio pesto recipe on pinterest:

    Pesto made with pistachios and served in a mason jar

    try these nut recipes too:

    • Nut Crusted Salmon
    • Snack Board
    • Peanut Butter Hummus

    Medjool Date Peanut Butter Eggs

    March 25, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Peanut Butter Eggs recipe is a twist on traditional Easter sweets, featuring Medjool dates filled with creamy nut butter and a vibrant coat of white chocolate. These little gems are not only delicious but also offer a healthier option for your celebration.

    Date Eggs 11

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Natural Delights. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make chocolate peanut butter eggs?
      • 1. Pit the dates
      • 2. Fill and freeze 
      • 3. Melt the chocolate
      • 4. Dip in chocolate
      • 5. Decorate
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I use dark chocolate?
    • Can you make these ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this chocolate "easter egg" recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other Medjool date recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    Creating these edible Medjool date peanut butter "eggs" is a fun activity that can become a cherished Easter tradition in your home. They're a healthier alternative to the conventional holiday candies and you get to unleash your creativity, making an edible work of art!

    A plate of colorful Medjool date peanut butter eggs coated in pastel-colored chocolate and adorned with spring-themed sprinkles

    Are these eggs healthy?

    These Medjool date "eggs" really resemble Easter eggs and can be a healthier option to have as a treat. 

    • Medjool dates are rich in potassium, iron, and satiating fiber without any added sugars. Did you know they are considered a fresh fruit?? 
    • Nut butter provides protein as well as healthy unsaturated fats which have been shown to lower cholesterol levels and reduce the risk of heart disease.
    • The average peanut butter egg you buy from a store contains 15+ grams of added sugar. Whereas, these peanut butter eggs contain around 7 grams of added sugar from the touch of white chocolate on top.

    If you're concerned about added sugars, you could always try opting for a sugar-free white chocolate. However, we have not tested this recipe with these alternatives so we are unsure of how well they melt.

    Assorted Medjool date eggs filled with peanut butter, dipped in colorful chocolate and sprinkles, perfect for a spring dessert table.

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Natural Delights Medjool dates: There are many types of dates, but we prefer Medjool dates for their soft texture and caramel-like taste. We always like to pick up a pack of Natural Delights Medjool Dates online or in the fresh produce section of the grocery store.
    • Nut butter of your choice: Whether it's peanut, almond, or cashew butter, each brings its unique flavor and set of nutrients.
    • White chocolate chips or candy melts: These are the canvas for your colorful Easter designs.
    • Coconut oil: Helps thin the chocolate for a smooth, dippable consistency.
    • Liquid or gel food coloring: Use pastel colors to create the spring feel.
    • Colorful Sprinkles: Look for Easter-themed sprinkles to make it extra festive.
    Ingredients on white backdrop

    How do you make chocolate peanut butter eggs?

    Creating these peanut butter eggs is a surprisingly simple process. Just don't be afraid to get a little messy!

    1. Pit the dates

    Start by slitting each Medjool date on one side to remove the pit, being careful not to cut all the way through the fruit. This creates a pocket for the nut butter filling.

    How to pit Medjool dates

    2. Fill and freeze 

    Fill each date with about one teaspoon of your chosen nut butter. Once filled, gently press the dates closed, encasing the nut butter. 

    Place the filled dates on a plate lined with parchment paper and freeze for 30 minutes. This step ensures the dates are firm enough for dipping into the chocolate.

    Peanut butter filled dates

    3. Melt the chocolate

    There's two ways you could go about melting the chocolate. We find that microwaving is usually quicker. 

    Microwave:  Place the chocolate in a microwave-safe bowl and heat in 30-second intervals at 50% power, stirring in between, until the chocolate is fully melted and smooth.

    Double Boiler: Set a heatproof bowl over a pot of simmering water, ensuring the bowl does not touch the water. Add the chocolate to the bowl, stirring occasionally until it melts completely.

    Once melted, stir in a few drops of food coloring to create 2 to 4 preferred colors such as pink, blue, green, and yellow.

    White chocolate to melt
    Melted white chocolate in a variety of colors

    4. Dip in chocolate

    After freezing, dip each date into the melted chocolate. Use a toothpick or fork to dip, ensuring each date is fully coated, then allow the excess to drip off.

    If at any point during decorating the chocolate begins to harden, simply re-microwave it for 30 seconds to restore its smooth texture.

    Dipping Medjool date in white chocolate

    5. Decorate

    If using sprinkles: Add right away to the chocolate covered dates before the chocolate hardens.

    If piping a design: Let the chocolate harden, then squeeze over your white chocolate design.

    Homemade Easter treat of Medjool date eggs stuffed with peanut butter, covered in a pastel chocolate shell with decorative sprinkles
    Piping white chocolate onto easter egg

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these date eggs are completely customizable. You get to choose what nut butter you want to use.

    • Nut or seed butter of your choice: peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, pumpkin seed butter, or another favorite kind.

    Can I use dark chocolate?

    Yes, you can substitute white chocolate with dark chocolate for a richer flavor and added antioxidant benefits. This will turn them into more of a Date "Snickers" feel.

    Just note that if you use dark chocolate, you won't be able to dye the chocolate different colors. However, you can still add over festive sprinkles when it's wet.

    Snickers dates

    Can you make these ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Feel free to make these eggs in advance and store them in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5 days, ready to be enjoyed whenever the Easter festivities begin.

    You could even freeze them for up to 2 months too.

    A bowl filled with chocolate-coated peanut butter Medjool date eggs, some cut in half to reveal the creamy and nutty center.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Leftover peanut butter eggs can be stored in an airtight container for up to 5 days at room temperature. 

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Date Eggs 15
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Medjool Date Peanut Butter Eggs

    This Peanut Butter Eggs recipe is a twist on traditional Easter sweets, featuring Medjool dates filled with creamy nut butter and a vibrant coat of white chocolate. These little gems are not only delicious but also offer a better-for-you option for your celebration.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Freeze Time30 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr
    Course: Sweet Treat Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: holiday
    Servings: 12 eggs
    Calories: 185kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 12 Natural Delights Medjool dates
    • ¼ cup peanut butter or nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, pumpkin seed butter, etc.)
    • 1 to 2 cups white chocolate chips or candy melts*
    • Coconut oil
    • Liquid or gel food coloring
    • Colorful Sprinkles (bonus for Easter themed ones!)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Start by slitting each Medjool date on one side to remove the pit, ensuring not to cut all the way through.
    • Fill each date with about one teaspoon of nut butter using a small spoon or a piping bag. Gently close the dates around the filling.
    • Place the filled dates on a plate lined with parchment paper and place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
    • Meanwhile, divide the white chocolate among small bowls, one for each color you wish to make. Melt the chocolate in a microwave in 30-second intervals at 50% power until melted, typically about 2 minutes in total.
    • To each bowl of melted chocolate, add a small spoonful of coconut oil followed by a few drops of food coloring. Stir to mix.
    • Using a toothpick, skewer each date then dip into the chocolate, ensuring it's fully coated. Gently shake off the excess chocolate and place the date back on the parchment paper.
    • Choose how you'd like to decorate the eggs:
      • For Sprinkles: While the dates are still wet with chocolate, immediately add Easter-themed sprinkles before the chocolate sets.
      • For Squiggly Lines: Wait until the chocolate coating is set, then use a piping bag to apply a different color of chocolate drizzles. To create a simple piping tool, grab a plastic sandwich bag and fill it with leftover melted chocolate. Then carefully snip away a tiny corner to create a small opening. Gently squeeze to pipe out the chocolate, decorating the dates with squiggly lines.
    • Store the date "eggs" in an airtight container at room temperature for up to a week.

    Video

    View this post on Instagram

    A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

    Notes

    Chocolate Amount: You will want about ½ cup chocolate chips for each color you plan on mixing. If you're only doing 2 colors, you will need ~1 cup of chocolate. If you are doing 4 colors (like shown in the photos), you will need ~2 cups of chocolate.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1date egg | Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 3g | Sodium: 15mg | Potassium: 250mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 25g | Calcium: 50mg

    save this chocolate "easter egg" recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do 1

    Want more? Try these other Medjool date recipes:

    • Protein Cookie Dough
    • No Bake Cheesecake Bites
    • Date Apple Cookies
    • Mini Bundt Cakes

    Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza

    February 13, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Tortilla Pizza recipe is perfect for anyone craving a quick meal with everyday ingredients. Customize it to suit your taste and dietary needs with your choice of cheese and veggies. Finally, top it with the star of the show-Beyond Steak, which are healthy plant-based steak bites packed with protein.

    Air fryer tortilla pizza with cheese and vegetable toppings.

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Beyond Meat. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What is Beyond Steak?
      • Is Beyond Steak healthy?
    • Make a heart pizza for Valentine's Day
    • Make a christmas tree for the holidays
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make air fryer tortilla pizza?
      • 1. Spread sauce
      • 2. Add cheese
      • 3. Add veggies
      • 4. Top with Beyond Steak
      • 5. Air fry until crispy
      • 6. Air fry until crispy
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Can I cook it in an oven or skillet?
      • Cook tortilla pizza in the oven
      • Cook tortilla pizza on a skillet
    • Customize it your way
      • Flavor combos to try
    • Can I make it ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this air fryer tortilla pizza recipe on pinterest:
    • try these other air fryer recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    There's something special about making pizza at home, and this Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza takes it to the next level with its simplicity and versatility. Here's why you'll come back to this recipe over and over:

    • Quick and Easy: With just a few minutes of prep and cooking time, you'll have a crispy, delicious pizza that beats any store-bought frozen alternative.
    • Customizable: Whether you're a vegetarian or vegan, this recipe can be adapted to your dietary preferences. 
    • Healthy: Using a tortilla as the base makes for a lighter pizza that's just as satisfying. Plus, loading up on veggies adds a nutritional punch too.
    Holding up piece of tortilla pizza

    What is tortilla pizza?

    Tortilla pizza is a quick and versatile alternative to traditional pizza. You'll use a tortilla as the base instead of dough. It's perfect to throw together for a super easy lunch or dinner.

    Is tortilla pizza healthy?

    Tortilla pizza can be a healthier alternative to traditional pizza. We're using tortillas to create a super thin, lower carb crust. Then, you'll pile on a generous portion of vegetables for vitamins, minerals, and fiber.

    Plus, we're using Beyond Steak which is a nourishing protein option, created using a blend of faba bean protein and wheat gluten.

    What is Beyond Steak?

    Beyond Steak
    Beyond Steak air fryer pizza

    I tried Beyond Steak last year and absolutely fell in love with its taste, texture, and nutrition. 

    Beyond Steak is a plant-based protein designed to mimic the taste, texture, and cooking experience of traditional beef steak. When you flip over the ingredients, you'll notice a line of simple ingredients including faba bean protein, wheat gluten, and pomegranate concentrate. It's truly such a great option for those looking to reduce their meat consumption or even those looking for a fun, new protein source.

    Air fryer pizza with steak

    Is Beyond Steak healthy?

    As a registered dietitian, I love incorporating this plant-based steak into meals because it provides 21 grams of protein and just 1 gram of saturated fat per serving. It's also filled with beneficial nutrients like potassium, iron, and fiber. It's even certified by the American Heart Association's heart-check program, meeting the strict nutrition guidelines to be considered a heart-healthy food!

    Recent research has shown replacing red meat with high-quality plant protein sources including plant-based meat may help lower LDL ("bad") cholesterol levels. Other studies have demonstrated diets rich in plant foods can potentially reduce the risk of heart disease and cancer.

    You can find Beyond Steak in the frozen section of your local grocery store. For this recipe we're adding it straight from frozen onto the pizza. For most other recipes, you'll simply pan saute it or air fry it for 5-6 minutes before enjoying.

    Make a heart pizza for Valentine's Day

    For a special Valentine's Day meal, you can create heart-shaped tortilla pizzas. Print out a large stencil and cut around it to shape your tortilla into a heart. Then, follow the same directions to create a fun Valentine's Day pizza that's as delightful to look at as it is to eat.

    Heart shape pizza
    Heart shape tortilla pizza for Valentine's Day

    Make a christmas tree for the holidays

    For a festive holiday twist, you can create tree-shaped tortilla pizzas! Simply print out a large tree stencil or use a tree-shaped cookie cutter to cut your tortillas into holiday-inspired shapes. Then, follow the same steps to assemble and bake your pizzas for a fun and festive treat that's as cheerful as it is delicious. Perfect for holiday parties or a cozy Christmas movie night!

    IMG 8468

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Tortillas (8 inches): The perfect canvas for your pizza masterpiece. Its size ensures a satisfying serving without overdoing it. We often use whole wheat tortillas for their added fiber and nutrients.
    • Pizza Sauce: Use 2 tablespoons to spread as the base. Feel free to explore other sauce options like pesto or white sauce for a twist too.
    • Cheese: Try mozzarella, cheddar, or a blend. Vegan options work great too!
    • Vegetables: Feel free to use just 1 veggie or a variety. This is a perfect way to use up any random bits of veggies in your fridge. 
    • Beyond Steak: A hearty plant-based protein addition. We love to keep this in our freezer at all times for a convenient protein option.
    • Italian Seasoning: This seasoning helps bring all the pizza flavors together.
    Customizable ingredients
    Veggies of your choice

    How do you make air fryer tortilla pizza?

    Forget spending hours making homemade pizza. This recipe comes together in 10 minutes or less. Here's how:

    1. Spread sauce

    To start, spread a thin layer of pizza sauce over the entire surface of a large tortilla, leaving a small border around the edges to prevent the sauce from spilling over. 

    Spread sauce on tortilla

    2. Add cheese

    Next, sprinkle a generous amount of cheese over the sauce. Whether you prefer mozzarella, cheddar, or a vegan alternative, the cheese acts as the glue that holds all your toppings in place.

    Add cheese on tortilla

    3. Add veggies

    Following the cheese, layer your chosen vegetables on top. Bell peppers, onions, and mushrooms offer a fantastic mix of textures and flavors, but feel free to get creative with whatever veggies you have on hand.

    Add veggies on tortilla

    4. Top with Beyond Steak

    For the protein, add Beyond Steak. This adds a hearty element to your pizza and is perfect to enjoy for a meatless meal.

    Add plant based steak on tortilla

    5. Air fry until crispy

    Finally, place your tortilla pizza in the air fryer and cook until the edges are crispy and the cheese is perfectly melted, usually about 6 minutes. This cooking method ensures a crispy base and bubbly top.

    Before air frying
    After air frying

    6. Air fry until crispy

    Letting the pizza cool allows it to get extra crispy. Try not to skip this step. If you don't have a cookie rack, you can even just let it cool in the air fryer basket.

    Air-fried tortilla pizza with steak tips and cheese on cooling rack

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Complement your air fryer pizza with a side of chopped leafy green salad or veggie sticks and dip.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: Make sure to follow the amounts and not overload your tortilla. This helps prevent it from becoming soggy. 
    • Double Tortillas: For those seeking a thicker crust, try using two tortillas on the bottom. Apply a thin layer of sauce (1 tablespoon) on the first tortilla, then press another tortilla on top and continue with the standard 2 tablespoons of sauce.
    • Scaling Tips: Feel free to make as many individual pizzas as you need. You'll just need to cook them in batches.
    Sliced tortilla pizza with Beyond Steak and colorful vegetables.

    Can I cook it in an oven or skillet?

    If you don't have an air fryer, don't worry! You can still enjoy delicious tortilla pizzas by using an oven or skillet. Here's how:

    Cook tortilla pizza in the oven

    1. Set your oven to 425°F.
    2. On a baking sheet, lay out the tortilla and top with sauce, your choice of cheese, vegetables, and Beyond Steak.
    3. Place in the oven for about 8 minutes, or until the edges are crispy and the cheese has melted.
    4. Before serving, let it rest on the pan outside of the oven for 2 minutes.

    Cook tortilla pizza on a skillet

    1. Warm up a skillet over medium-high heat.
    2. Place the tortilla in the skillet, cooking for 2 minutes on one side to get it crispy.
    3. Flip the tortilla over and top with sauce, cheese, veggies, and Beyond Steak.
    4. Cook for another 2 minutes or until the cheese is melted and gooey.
    Sliced tortilla pizza with Beyond Steak and colorful vegetables.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this tortilla pizza recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and veggies you want to use. 

    • Cheese of your choice: Use mozzarella for a classic, melty experience; cheddar for a sharper taste; or a vegan cheese alternative for those following a dairy-free diet. 
    • Veggies of your choice: The options are truly endless here. Just be sure to use a quick-cooking option rather than a harder vegetable like sweet potato or carrots. 
    • Other sauce options: Beyond traditional pizza sauce, you could also try pesto, BBQ, or a creamy white sauce to mix things up.
    Cutting pizza

    Flavor combos to try

    Can't decide what to top your pizza with? Here are a few classic pizza combos you'll love:

    • Pizza sauce, vegan mozzarella cheese, diced broccoli
    • Pesto sauce, mozzarella cheese, diced tomatoes
    • BBQ sauce, cheddar cheese, red onion
    • Enchilada sauce, mexican cheese, bell peppers
    Healthy tortilla pizza

    Can I make it ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Assemble your pizza but don't cook it. Store it in the fridge until you're ready, then follow the cooking instructions. Perfect for meal prep!

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. For reheating, pop it back in the air fryer for 2 minutes to restore its crispy texture.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Tortilla Pizza 19
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza

    This Tortilla Pizza recipe is perfect for anyone craving a quick meal with everyday ingredients. Customize it with your choice of cheese and veggies!
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Italian
    Keyword: valentines
    Servings: 1 individual pizza
    Calories: 430kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Large Air Fryer

    Ingredients

    • 1 large tortilla (8 inches in diameter)
    • 2 tablespoons pizza sauce
    • ½ cup shredded cheese of your choice (Use a vegan cheese to make this completely plant-based or choose other cheese options like mozzarella, cheddar, mexican blend, or parmesan)
    • ½ cup quick cooking vegetables of your choice, diced into ¼″ pieces (zucchini, yellow squash, bell peppers, broccoli, corn, tomatoes, onions, mushrooms, or a mixture)
    • ¼ cup Beyond Steak (You can add it right from frozen onto the pizza)
    • ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning, for garnish
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your air fryer to 390°F by heating the basket with nothing in it for 2 minutes.
    • On the tortilla, evenly spread a thin layer of pizza sauce, then add shredded cheese, vegetables, and Beyond Steak on top. Gently press everything down to adhere.
    • Carefully add to preheated air fryer basket and cook for 6 minutes, until edges are crispy and cheese is melted.
    • Gently remove pizza with a large spatula and set on a cooling rack. Let cool for 2 minutes before cutting into fourths.
    • Repeat steps to make more tortilla pizzas.

    Notes

    Reheating Note: To reheat any leftovers, you can warm pizza in a preheated air fryer at 390°F for 2 minutes, let cool briefly, then enjoy. Leftover tortilla pizza can also be enjoyed cold.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1pizza | Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 930mg | Potassium: 570mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Calcium: 520mg | Iron: 2.4mg

    save this air fryer tortilla pizza recipe on pinterest:

    Ready-to-eat air fryer tortilla pizza

    try these other air fryer recipes too:

    • Air Fried Chickpeas
    • Air Fryer Snap Peas
    • Air Fryer Corn Fritters
    • Breakfast Burritos made in the air fryer

    3 Ingredient Frozen Burrito Casserole

    February 8, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Short on time but still craving a delicious weeknight dinner? Try this Frozen Burrito Casserole uses ready-to-go burritos as the base layered with enchilada sauce and cheese. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice! This convenient and super simple recipe using frozen burrito is one that the whole family will love.

    Simple burrito casserole on a green towel using frozen burritos.

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are frozen burritos healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make this take on frozen burritos enchiladas?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you prepare this burrito casserole ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this frozen burrito casserole recipe on pinterest:
    • try these easy one pan recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    • Time-Saving: With just 5 minutes of prep time, this casserole is a lifesaver on busy days. Simply pop it in the oven and you'll have a scrumptious meal ready in no time.
    • Customizable: Whether you're a fan of fiber-filled beans, creamy guacamole, or zesty corn salsa, this recipe lets you personalize the toppings to suit your taste buds.
    Holding out a plate for lunch of frozen burrito enchilada

    What is a frozen burrito casserole?

    This recipe with frozen burritos is sort of like a simplified take on enchiladas. Let's be clear: we are by no stretch saying it's an authentic enchilada. However, it is a way to "hack" it and create a similar concept in just a matter of minutes.

    Are frozen burritos healthy?

    Frozen burritos can be a convenient and nourishing option, depending on the brand. Opt for burritos filled with veggies, beans, and/or lean meats to get a good dose of protein and fiber. I love grabbing burritos from Red's All Natural in the frozen section. In fact, this is the brand we've used in these photos. Boost the nutrient content by adding chopped veggies on top like green or sweet peppers, tomatoes, green onions or even any type of chopped lettuce you have on hand. Make it your own!

    Freshly baked burrito casserole with avocado and salsa.

    What ingredients do you need?

    You really only need 3 simple ingredients to create the base for this recipe.

    • Burritos: Choose your favorite burritos, be it bean, cheese, or meat-filled. They are the star of this dish.
    • Green Enchilada Sauce: This brings a tangy, slightly spicy flavor to the casserole.
    • Monterey Jack Cheese: Melts beautifully, adding a creamy, gooey texture.
    All ingredients on white background

    How do you make this take on frozen burritos enchiladas?

    • Prep the Oven and Dish: Preheat your oven to 425°F and lightly coat a baking dish with cooking spray and a bit of enchilada sauce.
    • Layer the Ingredients: Place the burritos in the dish, pour over the enchilada sauce, and sprinkle with cheese.
    • Bake to Perfection: Cover with foil and bake for 30 minutes. Then remove the foil and bake for another 10 minutes until the cheese is bubbly and golden.
    • Add Toppings: Serve hot with your choice of toppings like salsa, avocado, or a dollop of Greek yogurt.
    Frozen burritos in pan to bake
    Frozen burritos in pan to bake with cheese on top
    Frozen baked burritos in pan

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair with a side of Spanish rice or a simple green salad for a complete meal. A watermelon lime mocktail would make a great drink to have with it too!
    • Troubleshooting Tips: This recipe often cooks up a bit faster if you let the frozen burritos set out in the fridge overnight to partially thaw before cooking.
    • Scaling Tips: You can double the recipe but you'll want to use two separate pans or one extra large pan.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of our recipes, this Frozen Burrito Casserole is completely customizable. You get to choose which toppings and burrito fillings you want to use. Here are some ideas to try:

    • Burrito of your choice: Choose a smaller frozen burrito around 4 ounces as this will cook quicker. Feel free to pick bean, cheese, chicken, beef, sausage, or any flavor that's calling your name! We often like to grab Red's All Natural burritos with high quality ingredients!
    • Toppings of your choice: The sky's the limit! Try black beans, diced avocado, guacamole, diced tomatoes, salsa, fresh chopped cilantro, sour cream, plain Greek yogurt, or lime slices. These toppings are identical to ones we recommend in our nacho bar guide!
    • Sauce of your choice: Feel free to use either red enchilada sauce or green enchilada sauce. We're tested this recipe with both and can't decide what we like better. 
    Toppings of your choice

    Can you prepare this burrito casserole ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare this frozen burrito casserole in advance by prepping everything without baking it. Cover it with foil and refrigerate it for up to 8 hours. Yes, it's okay if the burritos start to thaw slightly.

    When you're ready to serve it, bake it according to the recipe instructions.

    Cheesy baked burrito dish with toppings

    How do I store leftovers?

    Since we're using frozen burritos for this recipe, the tortillas can often become a bit harder when they cool off. That's why this casserole is best enjoyed right away if possible. If you do end up with leftovers, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Then, reheat in the microwave for 1 minute before enjoying.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Frozen Burrito Casserole 7
    Print Recipe
    Be the first to rate this recipe!

    Frozen Burrito Casserole

    This casserole uses ready-to-go burritos as the base layered with enchilada sauce and cheese. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice!
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Mexican
    Servings: 5 servings
    Calories: 400kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish
    • 8"x8" pan baking dish

    Ingredients

    • Cooking spray
    • 15 ounce can red or green enchilada sauce
    • 5 frozen burritos of your choice (When testing this, I used Red's All Natural Burritos which are ~4 ounces in size)
    • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar cheese, mozzarella, monterey jack, pepper jack, Mexican blend, etc.)

    Toppings of your choice:

    • Guacamole
    • Diced avocado
    • Salsa
    • Queso
    • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt
    • Diced tomatoes
    • Sliced jalapeños
    • Chopped green onions
    • Sliced black olives
    • Corn kernels
    • Diced onion
    • Pickled red onion
    • Chopped cilantro
    • Sliced radishes
    • Shredded lettuce
    • Fresh limes, for squeezing over
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Heat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Spray a 8x8 or 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish with cooking spray.
    • Add a thin layer of enchilada sauce to the bottom of the pan.
    • Unwrap frozen burritos and place in the dish over the thin layer of sauce. Then, evenly cover with the rest of the can of enchilada sauce. Top with shredded cheese.
    • Cover the pan with foil and bake for 30 minutes, then remove foil and bake for 10 more minutes, until cheese is golden and burritos are cooked through. (The internal temperature should reach ~165ºF.)
    • Serve casserole with any toppings of your choice.

    Notes

    Toppings Ideas: View our Amazon storefront to see tons of toppings ideas!
    Storage Note: If you have any leftovers, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in the microwave for 60 seconds before enjoying.
    Flavor Combo Note: Not sure which sauce, burritos, and cheese combos go together? Here’s a few to try:
    • Green enchilada sauce + Cilantro lime chicken burritos + Monterey Jack cheese
    • Red enchilada sauce + Bean and cheese burritos + Cheddar cheese
    • Green enchilada sauce + Steak burritos + Pepper Jack cheese

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 400kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1160mg | Fiber: 2g

    save this frozen burrito casserole recipe on pinterest:

    Ready-to-eat burrito bake with spatula in the pan

    try these easy one pan recipes too:

    • Italian Meatloaf
    • Sheet Pan Sausage and Green Beans
    • Sushi Bake

    Customizable Nacho Bar – 4 Ingredients of Choice

    February 7, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

    A Nacho Bar is perfect to set up for impromptu gatherings, game day parties, or cozy movie nights at home. Customize with your choice of chips, protein, cheese, and toppings. Whether you're feeding a crowd or just treating yourself, this nachos bar will be a hit!

    A delectable combination of crunchy chips and toppings, ready for game day.

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are nachos healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you set up a nacho bar?
      • 1. Set out chips of your choice
      • 2. Offer protein of your choice
      • 3. Arrange various cheeses of your choice
      • 4. Pile on the toppings of your choice
    • Can you set up a nacho bar ahead of time?
    • Once you have everything prepped, how do you assemble the nachos?
      • 1. Start with the chips
      • 2. Distribute protein
      • 3. Add cheese
      • 4. Microwave and add toppings
    • Can you bake nachos in the oven?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this nacho bar guide on pinterest:
    • Check out these game day recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    • Versatility: One of the best parts about this recipe is its customizable options. Whether you prefer certain chips or protein, this recipe caters to all.
    • Protein-Packed: With a range of proteins from ground beef to tofu, these nachos ensure everyone creates a hearty and satisfying meal.
    • Cheesy Goodness: Who doesn't love cheese? With options ranging from classic shredded cheddar to crumbled feta, there's a cheesy delight for every palate.
    • Party Perfect: A nacho bar is the ultimate crowd-pleaser. It's a casual, fun, and engaging way to serve food, especially during events like Super Bowl parties or family gatherings.
    A plate of customizable nachos, showcasing a blend of savory and fresh ingredients next to lime margarita.

    What is a nacho bar?

    A nacho bar is a fun, interactive meal set up. Guests get to play chef and mix and match from the spread. It's a surefire way to satisfy all tastes and add a playful twist to your event!

    Are nachos healthy?

    They absolutely can be! With the right choices like chips in moderation, lean proteins, and plenty of veggies, nachos can be a balanced meal. You can even swap chips for a crunchy lettuce base for a taco salad option.

    All nacho bar ingredients displayed for game day

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Chips: Choose from white corn tortilla chips, blue corn chips, bean chips, grain-free tortilla chips, or sweet potato chips. Remember, the type of chip can influence the overall flavor and healthiness of your nachos.
    • Protein: Options include ground beef, shredded chicken, pulled pork, ground turkey, Beyond Steak, various beans, refried beans, tofu, and lentils. The protein not only adds flavor but also makes the nachos more filling and nutritious.
    • Cheese: Pick from shredded Mexican blend, cheddar, monterey jack, mozzarella, pepper jack, or crumbled feta. Cheese adds a rich, creamy texture and a boost of calcium.
    • Toppings: Here's where you can really get creative. Add guacamole, diced avocado, salsa, queso, Greek yogurt, tomatoes, jalapeños, onions, and more for a burst of flavor and nutrients.
    A close up of a tempting dish of layered nachos with cheese, diced vegetables, and spicy jalapeños.

    How do you set up a nacho bar?

    In true Cheerful Choices fashion… you can customize this nacho bar with all types of ingredients "of your choice". Here's how to set up your party-ready nachos line-up.

    1. Set out chips of your choice

    Start with a diverse selection of chips. Offer everything from traditional corn tortilla chips to unique options like blue corn, sweet potato, or grain-free alternatives. Arrange them in large bowls or platters for easy access.

    Chips of your choice on stone background

    2. Offer protein of your choice

    Next, prepare a variety of cooked and seasoned proteins. Don't be afraid to take shortcuts and buy pre-cooked options at the store. You can also view this guide for cooking all types of proteins like a pro. Include classics like seasoned ground beef or shredded chicken, and don't forget plant-based options like beans or tofu. Keep them warm in separate containers so guests can choose their favorite.

    Protein of your choice on stone background

    3. Arrange various cheeses of your choice

    Offer a range of cheeses, from shredded cheddar and Mexican cheese to crumbled feta. You can also think about having a hot, melty queso sauce set up. 

    Cheese of your choice on stone background

    4. Pile on the toppings of your choice

    Finally, create a rainbow of toppings-diced tomatoes, sliced jalapeños, olives, guacamole, sour cream, and more. Organize them in small bowls with spoons or tongs for easy serving, allowing everyone to customize their nacho masterpiece.

    Toppings of your choice on stone background

    Can you set up a nacho bar ahead of time?

    Setting up a nacho bar ahead of time is simple! Just prep your toppings-chop veggies, cook meats, and shred cheese if needed. Place everything needed into individual containers and refrigerate. When it's party time, warm up the necessary items and lay out your fresh toppings and chips for an easy, breezy serving.

    Close up of chip with ingredients on it

    Once you have everything prepped, how do you assemble the nachos?

    Like all of my other recipes, this Customizable Nacho Bar is completely adaptable. You get to hand pick every single ingredient you want to use. This means it can easily fit different dietary preferences and ingredients on hand. 

    We recommend making the nachos in this order for a perfect bite every time. 

    1. Start with the chips

    Start with a couple of large handfuls of chips per serving-exact measurements aren't necessary but 2 cups is a good reference.

    Adding tortilla chips to nacho plate

    2. Distribute protein

    Add whatever protein you decide on. You could even do a mixture of two different proteins.

    Adding cooked protein over nachos

    3. Add cheese

    We like to add the cheese on top of the protein so it melts easier and envelopes all the ingredients under it.

    Nacho Bar 9

    4. Microwave and add toppings

    Once everything is nice and melted and warmed through, you can add the cold toppings. Simple as that! This makes 1 individual serving, then you'll just have everyone repeat to create their unique nacho plate.

    Adding diced tomato over nachos

    Can you bake nachos in the oven?

    If you're aiming to make a larger batch of nachos at once, baking them in the oven is always a good option. Follow the same directions of spreading out your chips, protein, and cheese on a baking sheet, then bake at 350°F (175°C) for about 5-7 minutes, or until the cheese is bubbly and golden.

    Nachos on a sheet pan to bake in the oven

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair these nachos with a refreshing lime margarita or a cool glass of iced tea. They're great for game days, parties, or a fun family dinner.
    • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple this recipe by adjusting the ingredient amounts proportionally. For larger batches, use an oven to bake the nachos evenly.
    • Keeping It Warm: Cooked meats and queso can be kept warm on the stovetop, mini crock pots or transferred to glass containers with a lid.
    Freshly prepared nachos topped with melted cheese, juicy tomatoes, and creamy avocado.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Have extras left over from your nacho party? Store in airtight containers for up to 2 days in the fridge. 

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Nacho Bar 18
    Print Recipe
    5 from 5 votes

    Customizable Nacho Bar

    This Nacho Bar is perfect for game day parties or cozy movie nights. Customize with your choice of chips, protein, cheese, and toppings! Putting together these nachos takes less than 5 minutes.
    Prep Time3 minutes mins
    Cook Time2 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: party snack
    Servings: 1 serving of nachos
    Calories: 515kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    2 cups chips of your choice:

    • White corn tortilla chips
    • Blue corn chips
    • Bean chips
    • Grain-free tortilla chips
    • Sweet potato chips
    • Wilde Protein Chips

    4 ounces (½ cup) protein of your choice:

    • Ground beef, cooked and seasoned
    • Shredded chicken, cooked and seasoned
    • Pulled pork, cooked and seasoned
    • Ground turkey, cooked and seasoned
    • Beyond Steak, cooked in pan or air fryer
    • Canned beans, black beans, pinto beans, kidney beans - drained and rinsed
    • Refried beans
    • Tofu, crumbled and sautéed
    • Lentils, cooked

    ¼ cup cheese of your choice:

    • Shredded Mexican blend cheese
    • Shredded cheddar cheese
    • Shredded monterey jack
    • Shredded mozzarella
    • Shredded pepper jack
    • Crumbled feta cheese

    ¼ cup toppings of your choice:

    • Guacamole
    • Diced avocado
    • Salsa
    • Queso
    • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt
    • Diced tomatoes
    • Sliced jalapeños
    • Chopped green onions
    • Sliced black olives
    • Corn kernels
    • Diced onion
    • Pickled red onion
    • Chopped cilantro
    • Sliced radishes
    • Shredded lettuce
    • Lime wedges
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Spread the chips on a plate. Evenly distribute the cooked protein over the chips.
    • Sprinkle the cheese over the protein and chips. Microwave for 60-90 seconds until the cheese is melted and everything is warm.
    • Add toppings on top and serve immediately.
    • This will create an individual serving. Repeat as needed to create more servings.

    Video

    Notes

    Oven Note: You can make nachos in the oven too. Simply quadruple (4x) the recipe amounts and add chips, protein, and cheese to this sheet pan. Then, bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for about 5-7 minutes.
    Seasoning Protein Note: For cooking and seasoning your protein, simply cook your chosen meat (like ground beef or turkey) or plant-based protein (like tofu or tempeh) in a skillet over medium heat until thoroughly cooked, then sprinkle in a bit of taco seasoning to evenly coat the protein.
    Nutrition Note: Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for tortilla chips, chicken, Mexican cheese, tomato, and guac. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1plate of nachos | Calories: 515kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 25g | Sodium: 800mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 290mg | Iron: 2.5mg

    save this nacho bar guide on pinterest:

    Create your own nacho bar for parties

    Check out these game day recipes too:

    • Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese
    • Stuffed Bell Peppers
    • Buffalo Chicken Zucchini Boats
    • Cheddar Jalapeno Poppers

    40+ Healthy Desserts for One – Single Serve Desserts

    February 1, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 1 Comment

    Craving a quick and easy sweet to enjoy? We've rounded up 40+ single serving, healthy desserts for one! These mini desserts allow you to satisfy your sweet tooth without surrounding yourself with tempting sweets that stick around for days.

    Natural Delights Snickers Dates 2
    Salted Caramel Protein Energy Bites 9
    Protein Mug Cake 2
    Coconut Yogurt Bowl 11

    This post was first published on May 3, 2022 and was written by Cheerful Choices contributors, Corrin Coons and Sydney Coons. It was updated on February 1, 2024 to include new recipes and helpful tips.

    Table of Contents

    • Is dessert healthy?
    • Simple swaps to try
    • Perfect for Valentine's Day
    • 40+ healthy single serve desserts
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this single serve desserts guide on pinterest:

    Is dessert healthy?

    Ever felt like sweets were off limits because they weren't "healthy"? What if I told you that was all wrong? In fact, enjoying the desserts you know and love in moderation is one of the best ways to develop a sustainable and enjoyable eating pattern. 

    Desserts are a key part of many cultures, holidays, and gatherings. It's really just all about balance. So go ahead and enjoy a slice of grandma's famous blueberry cobbler. 

    Simple swaps to try

    While it's completely okay to eat the desserts you already know and love in their full-fledged, original, fatty, and sugary goodness- there are many simple swaps you can make when preparing desserts to pump up the nutritional value while still satisfying your dessert cravings!

    Here are some ways to modify dessert recipes to make more healthful alternatives:

    • Pump up the Protein: Add a scoop of protein powder or collagen peptides into baked goods like pancakes or banana bread.
    • Fill with Fiber: Replace all-purpose flour for whole wheat flour or other fiber-rich flours like chickpea or almond flour.
    • Swap out the Saturated Fat: Swap butter for applesauce or a heart-healthy oil. Applesauce can replace butter in a 1:1 ratio and you can typically replace 1 cup of butter with ¾ cup of oil.
    • Add Value through Vegetables: Add vitamins and minerals to your desserts by sneaking in shredded vegetables like zucchini or carrot into your favorite baked goods, You can also blend frozen cauliflower into flavorful smoothies without even knowing!

    Perfect for Valentine's Day

    Single serve desserts are the perfect match for a healthy Valentine's Day celebration, all while keeping the portions in check. These mini sweets allow you to treat yourself and your loved one to whatever you're craving, without overdoing it. Make these mini desserts instantly festive by adding over a dash of mini heart sprinkles or a couple drops of red food coloring!

    40+ healthy single serve desserts

    Without further ado-let's get into it! Here are single serve desserts to save and try this year.

    Protein Mug Cake
    This protein mug cake is just the sweet treat you've been looking for. It packs in 15 grams of protein-making it the perfect post workout snack, satisfying breakfast, or healthy dessert.
    Get the Recipe
    Protein Mug Cake 13
    2 Minute Apple Pie Crunch
    Craving something crunchy and sweet? This apple pie crunch is sure to satisfy both of those cravings and takes only 2 minutes to whip together!
    Get Recipe
    2 minute apple pie crunch 1
    Date Snickers
    These Date "Snickers" are a fun spin on a classic candy. This recipe calls for just 5 ingredients-Medjool dates, creamy peanut butter, crunchy peanuts, coconut oil, and melted chocolate of your choice.
    Get Recipe
    Snickers Date Recipe 4
    Medjool Date Peanut Butter Eggs
    Looking for Date Snickers best friend? Try the white chocolate version with these festive "easter egg" dates!
    Get Recipe
    Date Eggs 15
    Chocolate Chip Mug Cookie
    Want a moist and decadent chocolate chip cookie without having to wait for the oven? Try this chocolate chip mug cookie that can be made in the microwave in just a few minutes! Plus, this recipe is made without eggs or dairy, so it's allergen friendly!
    Get Recipe
    eggless mug cookie featured
    Coconut Yogurt Bowl
    Say hello to your new favorite easy breakfast! This coconut yogurt bowl calls for just 4 ingredients and only takes minutes to make.
    Get Recipe
    Coconut Yogurt Bowl 11 scaled
    Chocolate Mousse with Passionfruit
    This chocolate mousse features avocado as the secret ingredient and is topped with pomegranates and passionfruit to combine both chocolatey and fruity together in one amazing experience!
    Get Recipe
    Vegan Chocolate Mousse 6 scaled 1
    Churro Custard Toast
    This recipe takes toast to a whole new level! Creamy custard pairs with classic cinnamon and sugar to make a churro experience unlike any other!
    Get Recipe
    Churro Toast Featured Image 1 1024x1024 1
    Single Serve Bananas Foster
    Bananas smothered in a rum-flavored, buttery, caramel sauce? Sign us up! This dessert is super simple and perfect for any occasion!
    Get Recipe
    Single Serve Bananas Foster FB
    Nut Butter Stuffed Dates
    Looking for a sweet dessert that comes together in less than five minutes? Try these healthy, vegan stuffed dates filled with any nut butter and topping of your choice!
    Get Recipe
    Stuffed Dates 2 scaled
    Stovetop Apple Crisp
    There's nothing better than a warm, comforting apple crisp on a chilly fall day! Sweet apples combine with crunchy oats and pecans to make a truly magical experience!
    Get Recipe
    stovetop apple crisp
    High Protein Black Bean Brownies
    Enjoy the chocolatey, fudgey goodness that all brownie-lovers crave with the added benefit of some protein and fiber from the secret ingredient in these brownies: black beans!
    Get Recipe
    black bean brownies 8
    Chocolate Orange Chia Pudding
    Chocolate and orange are a match made in heaven! This recipe puts a lighter spin on pudding and is packed with calcium, magnesium, and phosphorus to promote bone health!
    Get Recipe
    Chocolate Orange Chia Pudding 8
    Lemon Blueberry Overnight Oats
    Breakfast meets dessert with these lemon blueberry overnight oats! This recipe is great to prepare the night before a busy morning and is super refreshing and satiating!
    Get Recipe
    IMG 6441 1200x628 1
    Vegan Mug Brownie
    This recipe is perfect for those late-night brownie cravings and can be made in just six minutes! Plus, it's rich, gooey, and chocolatey - everything you're looking for in a brownie!
    Get Recipe
    vegan mug brownie image 1200
    Pumpkin Spice Protein Shake
    Looking for the perfect pumpkin dessert? Look no further with this 5-ingredient pumpkin spice protein shake. Plus, this sweet shake packs in 25 grams of satisfying protein!
    Get Recipe
    Naked Nutrition 11
    Mini Low Sugar Cheesecake
    With only 6 ingredients and no oven required, this single serve cheesecake is perfect for when you're looking for something quick and easy.
    Get Recipe
    single serving keto cheesecake min
    Strawberry Cappuccino Ice Cream
    Calling all coffee lovers - this one's for you! With just three simple ingredients and one step it doesn't get much easier to make your own ice-cream.
    Get Recipe
    Strawberry Cappuccino Ice Cream PM1 e1651634197945
    Oat Milk Hot Chocolate
    This is a great dessert for a cozy winter night! It's dairy-free and vegan and is the perfect drink for any chocolate lover!
    Get Recipe
    hot chocolate with oat milk
    Frozen Chocolate Bananas
    Frozen chocolate bananas are an incredibly fun treat that will impress both kids and adults. They're easy to make, naturally sweet, and delicious.
    Get Recipe
    frozen chocolate bananas 12
    Salted Caramel Protein Balls
    Salted caramel protein balls make the perfect quick dessert. They're packed with plant-based protein to power your day. Plus, they're gluten-free, vegan, and have no added sugars!
    Get Recipe
    Salted Caramel Protein Energy Bites 9 scaled
    Snickerdoodle Mug Cake
    Want all of the cinnamon goodness from a snickerdoodle cookie baked up into a delicious single serve cake!? This simple yet delicious snickerdoodle mug cake won't disappoint!
    Get Recipe
    Snickerdoodle Mug Cake A Virtual Vegan HERO 1
    Single Serve Chocolate Chip Cookie
    Enjoy this warm, fresh-from-the-oven chocolate chip cookie without being tempted by a whole dozen! Throw some ice-cream on top and you've got a match made in heaven!
    Get Recipe
    Single Serving Deep Dish Chocolate Chip Cookie 2693
    Pumpkin Chia Seed Pudding
    This pumpkin chia seed pudding tastes like pumpkin pie in a jar and only requires 6 simple ingredients and 5 minutes of prep time!
    Get Recipe
    Pumpkin Chia Pudding
    Chia Seed Jam
    This chia seed jam is completely customizable and requires only two ingredients! Enjoy over dates or dark chocolate for a light dessert.
    Get Recipe
    Customizable Chia Jam 2 scaled
    Vegan Chocolate Bark
    This vegan chocolate bark is the perfect recipe for a lightly sweetened instant treat. Plus, there is no chocolate needed making this a quick and simple recipe to satisfy your sweet tooth!
    Get Recipe
    Quinoa Crunch Bark Square
    Single Serve Banana Split
    Craving dessert for breakfast? This high protein breakfast banana split features greek yogurt and delicious toasted coconut honey granola for a banana split like no other!
    Get Recipe
    breakfast banana split
    S'mores Cake in a Jar
    With a perfect graham cracker crust and a sweet chocolate and marshmallow center, this s'mores cake in a jar takes your classic campfire s'more to a whole new level!
    Get Recipe
    Smores Cake in a Jar Recipe
    Pumpkin Spice "Nice Cream"
    Calling all pumpkin-spice lovers! This refreshing, simple nice-cream recipe combines all the flavors of fall and is naturally sweetened with bananas and maple syrup for a healthy-spin on a classic fall treat!
    Get Recipe
    nice cream
    Lemon Mug Cake
    Looking for a bright and fresh new dessert? Treat your tastebuds to the citrusy-goodness of lemon with this fluffy lemon mug cake!
    Get Recipe
    lemon mug cake 2 683x1024 1
    Baked Oats for One
    This is the perfect cozy breakfast or dessert for one! Customize it with your favorite berries, nut butter, and any other toppings of your choice!
    Get Recipe
    Baked Oats for One Banzo Butter square 2
    Enjoy cozy fall flavors in this delicious apple crumble parfait. Plus, it's easy to make and ready in 5 minutes or less!
    Get Recipe
    Healthy Apple Crumble Parfait 2 765x1148 1
    Healthy Fruit Dip
    Looking for a healthy but delicious afternoon snack or dessert? This fruit dip is a great way to make a fruit snack more satiating and nutritious with added fat and protein from the peanut butter.
    Get Recipe
    healthy fruit dip 12 of 12 1024x768 1
    Dark Chocolate Avocado Truffles
    These dark chocolate avocado truffles are completely customizable and call for just 3 ingredients. Plus, they're ready to go in just under 20 minutes with no baking involved!
    Get Recipe
    5ADE2180 C1AC 4D80 B6CD 599FC59349D4 1 105 c
    Nutella Overnight Oats
    This recipe puts a decadent twist on a go-to breakfast option. Overnight oats are super easy to make and can be prepped the night before for a hassle-free, delicious breakfast!
    Get Recipe
    Nutella Overnight Oats 4
    Coconut Matcha Energy Bites
    These coconut matcha energy bites are packed-full of nutritious ingredients like coconut, nut-butter, seeds, and matcha green tea powder to fuel your day!
    Get Recipe
    Coconut Matcha Energy Bites 2 scaled
    Banana Parfait
    Want layers upon layers of creamy and flavorful banana-goodness? Whip up this easy, no-bake, banana parfait that will impress your eyes and your taste buds!
    Get Recipe
    FAT BADGER BAKERY Banana Parfait Plant Based on a Budget 3
    Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl
    There's nothing better than a bowl filled with LOTS of PB. This single serving smoothie bowl is easy to whip up as a sweet treat.
    Get Recipe
    Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl 3 scaled
    Greek Yogurt Cheesecakes
    These mini greek yogurt cheesecakes are lightened up with greek yogurt and topped with fresh berries for a quick and easy sweet treat!
    Get Recipe
    greek yogurt cheesecake 4
    Healthy Snickers Smoothie
    Craving a snickers bar but want something more satiating and nutritious? Try this healthy, snickers-inspired smoothie that will satisfy both your hunger and your taste buds!
    Get Recipe
    Screen Shot 2022 05 03 at 9.49.11 PM
    Strawberry Cheesecake Nice Cream
    This recipe combines two delicious desserts into one! Plus, it's naturally sweetened with fruit and takes just minutes to prepare! Perfect for a refreshing dessert on a hot summer day!
    Get Recipe
    Strawberry Cheesecake
    Personal Sized Peach Cobbler
    Looking for a way to enjoy some sweet, summer peaches? Whip up this easy, personal-sized peach cobbler topped with a crunchy crust and a dash of cinnamon.
    Get Recipe
    easy peach cobbler
    High Protein Cookie Dough
    For those who prefer the dough over the cookies, this one's for you! Plus, this recipe stars nourishing ingredients like Medjool dates, protein powder, and add-ins of your choice.
    Get Recipe
    Protein Cookie Dough 7

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    save this single serve desserts guide on pinterest:

    Healthy desserts for one - perfect for single serve - mini desserts
    Corrin and Sydney

    Guest Contributor Bio: Corrin and Sydney are both Registered-Dietitians-to-be from Westminster, Colorado who are passionate about helping others through food and nutrition. They are both currently Food Science and Human Nutrition majors at Colorado State University looking to graduate in 2023 and pursue their Masters in Dietetics. In their free time, Sydney and Corrin enjoy backpacking in the Colorado mountains, doing yoga, and cooking new recipes. They love sharing their passion for food with others and providing food inspiration on their Instagram page. You can connect with them on Instagram @nutri.liciouseats!

    Date Apple Cookies

    February 1, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These Date Apple Cookies are the perfect way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a better-for-you treat. Plus, you get to customize with your choice of nut butter and apples!

    Freshly baked cookies adorned with a caramel-like drizzle of date syrup and flaky sea salt, ready to be enjoyed.

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love these fluffy apple cookies
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make apple cookies?
      • 1. Gather your ingredients
      • 2. Blend wet ingredients
      • 3. Combine with dry ingredients
      • 4. Scoop and press down
      • 4. Bake and top
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make these date apple cookies ahead of time?
    • Can I turn them into cookie bars?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • Want more? Try these other dietitian-approved cookie recipes:

      Why you'll love these fluffy apple cookies

      Whether you're meal prepping for the week, planning a picnic, or just looking for a wholesome treat, these cookies are sure to be a hit! Here's why you'll fall head over heels for them.

      • Natural sweetness: The combination of Medjool dates and apples gives these cookies a delightful, natural sweetness without the need for much added sugar.
      • Customizable: Whether you're a fan of different nut butters or apples, this recipe lets you choose your favorites.
      • Great for holidays: These cookies are perfect for Valentine's Day, a spontaneous baking afternoon, or to bring to a holiday party.
      Fluffy stacked apple date cookies

      Are these apple cookies healthy?

      These cookies contain a number of nourishing ingredients like dates, whole wheat flour, and apples.

      Dates are a fantastic source of fiber, vitamins, and minerals. They also provide natural sweetness, reducing the need for added sugars.

      Using whole wheat flour adds more fiber and nutrients compared to regular white flour, making these cookies a healthier choice.

      Finally, the star of the show: apples! Apples are not only delicious but also packed with vitamin C and important dietary fiber. Apples are rich in a specific type of fiber called soluble fiber, which research shows helps slow down the digestion process and promotes appetite-suppressing signals in the body. In turn, this leads to feeling fuller and more satisfied for longer. 

      Neatly prepared baking ingredients with vibrant chopped apples and rich Medjool dates set against a modern kitchen backdrop.

      What ingredients do you need?

      • Medjool Dates: There are all types of dates but I tend to love Medjool for their caramel-like sweetness. Find them in the produce of your grocery store.
      • Whole Wheat Flour: This flour adds a nutty flavor and boosts the fiber content. Look for it in the baking aisle.
      • Apples: Select firm, fresh apples for the best flavor and texture. We tend to use red apples over green for more sweetness.
      • Nut Butter: Opt for a natural, unsweetened version of your favorite nut butter. This adds a creamy texture and healthy fats.

      How do you make apple cookies?

      These cookies have a few different steps, but come together super quick.

      1. Gather your ingredients

      Preheat your oven to 350ºF and line your baking sheet with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat. Make sure you have all your wet and dry ingredients measured and ready to go, including the Medjool dates, maple syrup, your choice of nut butter, and chopped red apples.

      Blended wet ingredients in food processor

      2. Blend wet ingredients

      In a blender or food processor, blend the wet ingredients. This creates a rich, flavorful base for your cookies.

      Mixing apple cookies dough
      Dough in Kitchenaid

      3. Combine with dry ingredients

      Mix the wet and dry ingredients until just combined. You can either use a hand mixer or a stand mixer like a Kitchenaid. Gently fold in the diced apples and chopped dates to distribute them evenly throughout the batter.

      Scooping cookies onto pan
      Pressing cookies flat with hands

      4. Scoop and press down

      Using a cookie scoop or a tablespoon, scoop the batter onto your prepared baking sheet. Space the scoops about 2 inches apart to allow for spreading. Gently press down on each scoop with your hand or the back of a spoon to flatten them to about ½-inch thickness. This helps them bake evenly and gives them that classic cookie shape.

      Baking sheet full of date apple cookies, golden-brown and ready to enjoy, with a date syrup on the side
      Baking sheet full of date apple cookies, golden-brown and ready to enjoy, with a date syrup drizzled over

      4. Bake and top

      Keep an eye on the cookies, as oven temperatures can vary. Timing wise-8 minutes tends to give a softer cookie, 10 minutes for a soft-crunchy combo, and 12 minutes for a crunchier texture. After baking, allow the cookies to cool on the pan for a few minutes before transferring them to a wire rack to cool completely. For an extra touch of sweetness and elegance, drizzle over a generous amount of date syrup and sprinkle with flakey sea salt.

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Pair these cookies with a glass of almond milk or your favorite herbal tea for a cozy evening snack.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If your dough is too sticky, you can chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before shaping.
      • Scaling Tips: This recipe can easily be doubled. Just make sure to use a larger baking sheet or bake in batches.
      Date cookies lined on a cooling rack

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this Date Apple Cookie is completely customizable. You get to choose what type of apples and nut butter you want to use.

      • Apples of your choice: Experiment with different apple varieties for varying levels of sweetness and texture. This is a great recipe to use any that have been sitting in your fridge for a while.
      • Nut butter of your choice: Try almond, peanut, or cashew butter to change up the flavor profile. Make sure they're creamy for the best texture for the dough.

      Can I make these date apple cookies ahead of time?

      Absolutely! Simply prepare the dough in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 2 days. Then, you can scoop and bake when you're ready. Note: If you're cooking from the chilled dough, they may take a couple minutes longer to bake.

      A woman's hand with a pop of red nail polish holds cookies

      Can I turn them into cookie bars?

      Yes! If you want to make these apple cookies into apple cookie bars, simply add the batter into an 8x8-inch pan and bake for around 30-32 minutes until cooked through.

      How do I store leftovers?

      Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 4 days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze them for up to a month.

      Date apple cookies stacked on a platter

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Date Apple Cookies16
      Print Recipe
      4.75 from 4 votes

      Date Apple Cookies

      These Apple Cookies are the perfect way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a better-for-you treat. Customize with your choice of nut butter and red apples.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time15 minutes mins
      Servings: 2 dozen small cookies
      Calories: 80kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • Silicone baking mat
      • Pre-cut parchment paper sheets

      Ingredients

      Wet Ingredients:

      • 6 Medjool dates, pitted (about ⅔ cup)
      • ¼ cup maple syrup
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • ¼ cup nut butter of your choice (We tested this with either peanut butter or almond butter which work well. You could also experiment with cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, hazelnut butter, etc.)
      • 1 tablespoon coconut oil, melted in the microwave (then let cool for 1 minute in order to not cook the egg)

      Dry Ingredients:

      • 1 ½ cups (160 grams) whole wheat flour
      • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • ½ teaspoon baking soda
      • ⅛ teaspoon salt
      • 1 cup red apples of your choice, peeled and chopped into ¼-inch pieces (Honeycrisp, Envy, SugarBee, Fuji, Gala, Pink Lady, or Braeburn etc.)
      • 2 Medjool dates, pitted and chopped into ¼-inch pieces

      Optional Toppings:

      • Date syrup
      • Flakey sea salt
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat the oven to 350º F. Line a half size (18"x13") baking sheet with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat.
      • In a blender or food processor, blend dates, maple syrup, egg, vanilla, nut butter, and coconut oil.
      • In a large bowl or stand mixer, combine flour, cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Mix until combined. Then, gently stir in chopped apples and dates.
      • Add blended wet ingredients to the dry ingredients and mix until just combined.
      • Scoop out with cookie scoop (~1 tablespoon) and add to the prepared baking sheet. Gently press down with your hand to flatten to about ½-inch thickness. Repeat with remaining batter.
      • Bake cookies for 8-12 minutes then let cool on a rack.
      • If desired, drizzle over a generous amount of date syrup and flakey sea salt on top.
      • Store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days.

      Video

      Notes

      Cookie Baking Times: The recipe mentions baking for 8-12 minutes. 8 minutes will yield a soft texture with no crunch. In our opinion, 10 minutes is usually just right with a soft crunchy combo. Then, 12 minutes will be more of a fully crunchy cookie.
      Cookie Bars: If you want to make these into cookie bars, simply add the batter into 8”x8” pan and bake for ~30-32 minutes until cooked through.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g

      save this lower sugar apple cookies recipe on pinterest:

      Healthy apple cookies

      A big thanks to Cheerful Choices intern Claire for her help testing this cookie recipe!

      Want more? Try these other dietitian-approved cookie recipes:

      • Strawberry Protein Cookies
      • Trail Mix Cookies
      • Peanut Butter Oatmeal Cookies

      Buffalo Chicken Wraps with Veggies

      January 29, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      These Buffalo Chicken Wraps are ideal for those game day parties or a busy weeknight. This recipe is packed with a cheesy buffalo dip topped with veggies and rolled up in a tortilla. The best part? You get to customize these wraps with cheese and veggies of your choice!

      A close-up of a halved buffalo chicken wrap with a tangy, cheese-filled center, alongside a serving bowl of buffalo dip and raw veggies

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • Are buffalo wraps healthy?
      • What ingredients do you need?
      • How do you make these buffalo chicken wraps?
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can I make it ahead of time?
      • How do I store leftovers?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this buffalo wraps recipe on pinterest:
      • try these other game day recipes too:

      Why you'll love it

      This recipe is sure to be a favorite for a number of reasons.

      • Flavorful: The perfect balance of spice from the buffalo sauce and coolness from the ranch and cheese.
      • Perfect for Parties: Ideal for those parties when you want to serve up something delicious but don't have much time.
      • Customizable: Choose your favorite veggies to add a fresh crunch.

      What are buffalo chicken wraps?

      Buffalo chicken wraps are a scrumptious twist on traditional game day fare. They combine fiery buffalo dip with the freshness of your favorite veggies, all wrapped in a tortilla. Serve these at your Super Bowl party or enjoy as a unique lunch or dinner.

      Hands holding a buffalo chicken wraps cut in half to show the creamy filling, with a bowl of buffalo dip surrounded by chips and carrot sticks in the background.

      Are buffalo wraps healthy?

      As a dietitian, I'm all about balance. Let's be honest: this recipe does include some high-calorie goodies like ranch dressing and cheese. However, it's important to be able to incorporate some of these rich ingredients into our diets without guilt. This builds sustainable eating patterns. Remember: life is about both enjoying our food and letting it nourish our bodies with nutrients.

      There are some simple ways we're making these wraps healthier though.

      • Opt for low-fat cream cheese for less fat and calories. 
      • In addition to the veggies in the wrap, feel free to have more veggies on the side.
      • Look for whole grain wraps for a bit extra fiber.

      What ingredients do you need?

      • Buffalo Sauce: The MVP of this recipe! Find your favorite brand and get ready for some heat. We love using Primal Kitchen's buffalo sauce.
      • Ranch Dressing: It cools down the spice and adds creaminess. Light versions work great too!
      • Cheese: Use your favorite cheese like sharp cheddar or pepper jack for some extra heat.
      • Cream Cheese: We're calling for Greek or low-fat cream cheese but you can also use whole fat versions.
      • Chicken: Shredded rotisserie chicken is our go-to for convenience and flavor. There's also pre-shredded chicken typically available in the deli department.
      • Tortillas: Perfect for wrapping up all that goodness. 
      • Veggies: Adds important color, vitamins, and minerals into the mix. 
      Buffalo dip on tortilla
      Veggies added on tortilla

      How do you make these buffalo chicken wraps?

      • Make buffalo dip: Combine all buffalo dip ingredients and cook until melted and thickened into a dip. This part alone is sooo good.
      • Add over fillings: Add buffalo dip to tortilla then top with veggies.
      • Roll and heat: Need help rolling wraps? View this guide before rolling. Then, you have the option to heat it up. We love doing this to get the tortilla crispy on the outside.
      Rolled tortilla
      Cooked buffalo wrap

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Try serving these wraps alongside similar dippers you'd have out for buffalo dip like celery, carrots, and pita chips.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: The dip may be thinner or thicker depending on the ingredients you use. If the texture is thinner, you may need to use less buffalo dip inside the tortilla to make it easier to wrap. You can also let the dip cool slightly to allow it to thicken up.
      • Scaling Tips: You can always scale this recipe down by cutting it in half if you only want to make 4 wraps.
      Spoonful of buffalo dip

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this buffalo chicken wrap is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and veggies you want to use.

      • Shredded cheese of your choice: Cheddar cheese is typically traditional to buffalo dip but you can customize with most of any cheese you prefer-just make sure to use shredded to it easily melts. Customize with Mozzarella, Monterey Jack, Pepper Jack, Gouda, or Colby.
      • Veggies of your choice: Mix it up depending on what you're craving or have on hand. Veggies like bell peppers, tomatoes, celery, carrots, zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, onions, mushrooms, lettuce, or a mixture all work great. If serving the wraps with lettuce, we'd recommend serving right away without cooking the tortilla so the lettuce doesn't wilt.
      Adding lettuce to buffalo wrap
      Buffalo wraps with lettuce

      Can I make it ahead of time?

      You bet! Whip up the buffalo dip beforehand and keep it in the fridge. On game day, just assemble, heat, and serve. You won't miss a minute of the action. 

      You can also fully prep the wraps and store in the fridge until ready to eat.

      How do I store leftovers?

      Got leftovers? No problem! Tuck them away in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. They're great for a post-game day snack.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Buffalo Dip Wraps 9
      Print Recipe
      Be the first to rate this recipe!

      Buffalo Chicken Wraps

      These Buffalo Chicken Wraps are ideal for those game day parties or a busy weeknight. Customize with cheese and veggies of your choice!
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time20 minutes mins
      Servings: 8 wraps
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      Buffalo Dip Ingredients:

      • 1 cup buffalo sauce
      • ½ cup ranch dressing
      • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar, mozzarella, monterey jack, pepper jack, gouda, or colby)
      • 1 package (8 ounces) Greek or low fat cream cheese, softened
      • 3 cups cooked and shredded chicken

      Wrap Ingredients:

      • 8 - 8 inch tortillas
      • 2 cups quick cooking vegetables of your choice, diced into ¼″ pieces (bell peppers, tomatoes, celery, carrots, zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, onions, mushrooms, lettuce or a mixture)
      • 4 cups buffalo dip (from recipe above)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      Buffalo Dip Instructions:

      • In a medium-size pot over medium heat, combine the buffalo sauce, ranch, shredded cheese, and cream cheese. Cook for 8 to 10 minutes, or until the mixture is smooth and the cream cheese is completely melted.
      • Stir in the shredded chicken and continue cooking for another 5 minutes, until heated through.

      Wrap Instructions:

      • Lay out a tortilla on a flat surface.
      • Spread ½ cup of the prepared buffalo dip evenly over the tortilla followed by ¼ cup veggies of your choice.
      • Roll the tortilla tightly, securing the contents inside.
      • Repeat with the remaining tortillas for a total of 8 wraps.
      • Optional: For a crispy tortilla, lightly coat a pan with cooking spray. Then, pan fry the rolled wraps on medium heat for 3-4 minutes per side.
      • Store any leftover wraps in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

      save this buffalo wraps recipe on pinterest:

      Buffalo chicken wraps for game day

      try these other game day recipes too:

      • Customizable Snack Board
      • Jalapeno or Mini Pepper Poppers
      • Maple Soy Glazed Walnuts

      Customizable Quick Pickled Red Onions

      January 25, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      These quick pickled red onions recipe is perfect for adding a zesty kick to your meals. Featuring a blend of red onions (diced or sliced) and apple cider vinegar. They're customizable too-use any sweetener of your choice like honey or a sugar substitute!

      Top view of a jar filled with diced pickled red onions, with a spoonful beside it and a half-sliced red onion

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • Are pickled onions healthy?
      • What ingredients do you need?
      • How to cut red onions?
      • How to make quick pickled red onions
      • Using quick pickled red onions
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can you make these pickled onions ahead of time?
      • How long can I store pickled onions?
      • Can you pickle white onions?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this easy pickled red onion recipe on pinterest:

      Why you'll love it

      At first glance, pickled onions might seem like just another condiment, but oh, how they transform a dish! Think: sweet + tangy! Their vibrant color and tangy flavor can really turn an ordinary meal into extraordinary.

      Whether it's jazzing up a simple sandwich or salad, these pickled onions always add amazing flavor. 

      Quick pickled onions vs traditional pickled onions

      Both methods can really shine, but in our opinion-quick pickled onions make the most sense for those with a busy schedule. Let's talk about the main differences.

      • Time and Taste: The biggest difference lies in the time they take to pickle and the taste. Our quick pickled onions can be prepped in a matter of minutes and are ready overnight. They have a bright, tangy flavor. Traditional pickled onions, on the other hand, require several weeks to mature and have a more mellow taste.
      • Prep Method: Quick pickling involves a simple mix of vinegar, water, and flavorings heated together. Traditional pickling can include fermentation or a more complex canning process. Here's a guide to traditional pickling!

      Are pickled onions healthy?

      Onions are packed with antioxidants and compounds like "quercetin" (a plant pigment and flavonoid) that research shows may help reduce inflammation.

      Apple cider vinegar (ACV) is also a popular kitchen staple. It can be used in salad dressings, smoothies, and soups. Some research shows a modest amount of ACV may help improve fasting blood sugar levels and HbA1c levels in individuals with diabetes. But honestly, research is pretty limited here to fully support these potential benefits.

      Ingredients on white counter

      What ingredients do you need?

      • Red Onion: These bulbs are best when fresh and firm. You can find them in the produce section. You can use either 1 full small red onion or half of a large one.
      • Apple Cider Vinegar: Aim to purchase one with "the mother" which will have a weird looking cloudy substance in the bottle. Don't worry - this indicates beneficial bacteria at work, which is great for gut health.
      • Sweetener of Your Choice: Whether it's traditional sugar or a better-for-you alternative like monk fruit or honey, each brings a unique touch and flavor.
      Chopping onion in veggie chopper
      Chopping onion in veggie chopper

      How to cut red onions?

      For this recipe you can either dice or slice onions. We prefer using our veggie chopper and dicing them in small pieces.

      If you are chopping them yourself, here's how to do it. It may be helpful to watch this video on how to cut them too.

      • Slice: First, you're going to cut the onion in half. Then, place the onion half face down and chop off both ends of the onion - the root and the top. Next up, peel off that outer layer. Then, make thin, even slices along the onion ridges to create half moon slices.
      • Dice: First, you're going to cut the onion in half. Then, place the onion half face down and cut off just one end of the onion this time. Peel off the outer layer. Make vertical slices down the ridges, but here's the key - don't slice all the way through the root end; it holds everything together. Then, turn your knife to make opposite cuts down toward the root. Voila! You've got beautifully diced onion.

      Need more hands-on help with your knife skills? In our "Coaching + Cooking" program, we teach these foundational skills 1:1!

      Diced red onions in jar
      Diced red onions in jar covered in brine

      How to make quick pickled red onions

      1. Prep: Start by dicing or slicing the onion. Follow the instructions above if you need help.
      2. Mix and Heat: Combine the water, vinegar, salt, peppercorns, and sweetener. Heat this mixture until everything dissolves. You can do this on the stove but we prefer microwaving to save time.
      3. Jar It Up: Place the onions in a mason jar and pour over the hot vinegar mix, ensuring the onions are fully submerged for even pickling.
      4. Cool and Store: Let it cool to room temperature, then add over the jar lid and refrigerate. Overnight you'll start to see the liquid color change and the flavors will infuse.

      Using quick pickled red onions

      I always like to keep pickled red onions in the fridge for an instant flavor booster. Here's some ways to use them:

      • Customizable nachos
      • Caesar salads 
      • Avocado egg toast
      • Tofu tacos
      • Veggie burgers
      • Roast beef sliders 
      • Charcuterie board spread
      • Air fryer tortilla pizzas
      A mason jar showcasing vibrant pickled red onions diced into small pieces, with a copper spoon and a raw red onion

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Troubleshooting Tips: If your onions aren't fully submerged, add a bit more water. The key is to keep them covered in the pickling liquid.
      • Scaling Tips: This recipe is super scalable. Feel free to double the ingredients-this should also fit fine in a 16-ounce wide-mouth mason jar.

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this pickled onion is completely customizable. You get to choose what sweetener ingredients you want to use. 

      Sweetener of your choice: Feel free to use a traditional granulated option or a liquid sweetener. Options like honey or maple syrup add a unique flavor, while sugar alternatives keep it lower calorie and lower sugar.

      Homemade quick pickled red onions in a glass jar with tan lid

      Can you make these pickled onions ahead of time?

      Absolutely! In fact, pickled onions should ideally sit for about 30 minutes or longer before they're ready to eat. Feel free to make them a few days in advance, and watch how their flavor and color evolves.

      How long can I store pickled onions?

      You can store quick pickled red onions in the jar for up to a month in the fridge. I like to label and date when I made them so I know when it's time to finish them up or toss them.

      After a month, the texture will usually be much softer and not as desirable. If you notice any type of off smell or mold growing, be sure to discard the pickled onions.

      Red onions before and after sitting

      Can you pickle white onions?

      Absolutely! White onions can be pickled using the same method. They offer a sharper, less sweet flavor. Just know, they won't have that beautiful pink hue like the pickled red onions.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Quick Pickled Red Onions 7
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Quick Pickled Red Onions

      This quick pickled red onion recipe is perfect for adding a zesty kick to your meals. Customizable too-use any sweetener of your choice like honey or a sugar substitute!
      Prep Time7 minutes mins
      Cook Time3 minutes mins
      Servings: 1 cup
      Calories: 20kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • 2-cup glass liquid measuring cup
      • 16 ounce wide-mouth mason jar (shown in the photos)

      Ingredients

      • 1 small red onion or ½ large red onion, diced or sliced (yields about 1 cup)
      • ½ cup water
      • ½ cup apple cider vinegar
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • 1 teaspoon whole peppercorns
      • 1 tablespoon sweetener of your choice (white sugar, monk fruit, honey, maple syrup, sugar alternative)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Prep your red onion by either dicing or slicing, depending on your preference.
      • In a 2-cup glass liquid measuring cup, mix together water, apple cider vinegar, salt, peppercorns, and sweetener.
      • Heat the mixture in the microwave on high for about 2-3 minutes or until it starts to simmer and the sweetener and salt dissolve. Be careful when removing the bowl from the microwave as it will be hot.
      • Place the onions in a 16 ounce wide-mouth mason jar. Carefully pour the hot vinegar mixture over the onions, ensuring they are completely submerged. You can gently press the onions down if necessary.
      • Allow the mixture to cool to room temperature. Once cooled, seal the jar with its lid.
      • Store the pickled onions in the refrigerator and let sit for at least 30 minutes before eating. Store extras in the fridge for up to 1 month.

      Notes

      Cutting Onions: New to cutting onions? Read this guide OR watch this video to dicing or slicing your onions. This is also a skill I teach in my Coaching + Cooking program that's 1:1 with myself, a culinary dietitian!

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8servings | Calories: 20kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g

      save this easy pickled red onion recipe on pinterest:

      Quick pickled red onions top view

      Customizable Microwave Kale Chips

      January 18, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

      These 3-minute microwave kale chips are a game-changer for anyone looking for a quick, healthy snack. It's also a fantastic way to use up any extra kale that might otherwise go to waste. Plus, you get to customize with your favorite seasonings and oils. Get ready to make a crispy, healthy snack!

      Holding kale chip

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love these microwave kale chips
      • Are kale chips healthy?
      • Ingredients you'll need
      • How to make microwave kale chips
        • 1. Trick to remove the kale stem
        • 2. Tear into pieces
        • 3. Add to a plate
        • 4. Add oil and seasonings
        • 5. Microwave
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • What to do with the kale stems
      • How many kale chips does this recipe make?
      • What should I use kale chips for?
      • Customize it your way
      • Can you make kale chips ahead of time?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this microwave kale chips recipe on pinterest:
      • Try these other kale recipes too:

      This post was first published on April 3, 2019. It was updated on January 18, 2024 with more helpful cooking notes and photos.

      Holding up bagel seasoning kale chip

      Why you'll love these microwave kale chips

      • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 3 minutes, these kale chips are perfect for a fast, healthy snack.
      • Customizable: Flavor these chips with seasonings of your choice. From olive oil and sea salt to unique seasonings, the possibilities are endless.
      • Healthy Snack Option: Kale is packed with nutrients, making these chips a guilt-free snack.

      Are kale chips healthy?

      Absolutely! Kale is a superfood, rich in vitamins A, K, and C, alongside other nutrients and antioxidants. Kale can often go to waste in the back of the fridge, especially if you're not feeling inspired with recipes. When you opt for this quick microwave method, you get a crispy kale chip you'll be craving on repeat.

      How to make microwavable kale chips

      Ingredients you'll need

      • Kale: The star of the show, kale provides a nutrient-rich base for these chips.
      • Oil: A drizzle of oil helps the kale crisp up in the microwave. You can experiment with different oils for varied flavors.
      • Seasonings: From classic salt and pepper to creative combinations like parmesan or sesame seeds, choose your favorite flavors to enhance these chips.

      How to make microwave kale chips

      Forgot waiting by the oven to make kale chips, easily make them in your microwave in 3 minutes or less. Here's how.

      1. Trick to remove the kale stem

      Start by washing the kale leaf and removing the thick stem down the center. You can cut it out with a knife or easily rip it out with your hands. To remove it with you hands, you can make an 'O' shape with your fingers, encircle the stem with your fingers, and then gently pull up from the bottom to top, stripping it off the stem.

      Hands tearing kale leaves
      Microwave Kale Chips 2

      2. Tear into pieces

      Then cut or tear the kale into bite-sized pieces. Typically around 2"x2" is a good size.

      Microwave Kale Chips 3
      Microwave Kale Chips 4

      3. Add to a plate

      Grab a microwave safe plate and evenly spread out your kale chips. Don't let them overlap. If you have extra, work in batches.

      Kale chips on plate

      4. Add oil and seasonings

      Add flavor additions of your choice, like avocado oil and bagel seasoning (as shown in the photos).

      Kale chips on plate with seasonings

      5. Microwave

      Microwave until the kale gets nice and crispy. Be sure to check on it and use your hands to feel if it's crispy or not. You should essentially be able to pick it up and have it not flop over at all.

      Kale chips added to microwave

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Make sure the kale is completely dry before adding oil and seasonings, as excess moisture can lead to uneven cooking.
      • The kale chips generally shouldn't stick to the plate since they have oil on them. However, for easier clean up you can place a sheet of microwave-safe parchment paper on the plate before adding the kale chips. Definitely avoid materials like wax paper or aluminum foil which can catch fire in a microwave.
      • Avoiding overcrowding the plate with kale to ensure even cooking.
      • Microwave in short intervals and keep your eye on the kale to assess its crispiness.
      • If your kale isn't crispy enough, microwave for an additional 30 seconds.

      What to do with the kale stems

      Kale stems are typically discarded but they're actually edible and you can use them in various recipes. Try grilling kale stems, chopped and adding to a stir fry, or blending into a morning juice. If you are are going to toss them, consider adding them to your compost bin.

      What to do with the kale stems

      How many kale chips does this recipe make?

      This recipe makes about 8 kale chips per large kale leaf. Definitely feel free to repeat with multiple kale leaves to use up the whole bunch! Just make sure to microwave in batches to avoid overcrowding the plate.

      What should I use kale chips for?

      These kale chips are great added to salads or enjoyed as a savory snack. Since they're ultra crunchy, they can also be crushed and used as a crunchy topping for soups or pasta.

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my recipes, these 3-minute microwave kale chips are completely customizable. You get to choose oil and seasonings of your choice. You can even use a mixture to fill up the ~1 teaspoon seasonings of your choice. Here are some delicious variations to try:

      • Everything Bagel: Avocado oil, bagel seasoning
      • Asian Sesame Kale Chips: Garlic olive oil, soy sauce, sesame seeds
      • Cheesin' Kale Chips: Parmesan cheese or nutritional yeast, olive oil, sea salt
      • Popcorn Kale Chips: Butter olive oil, butter seasoning
      • Maple Balsamic Kale Chips: Red wine vinegar, olive oil, dijon mustard, maple syrup, balsamic vinegar, salt
      Microwave kale chips

      Can you make kale chips ahead of time?

      Kale chips should ideally be eaten right away to maintain their crispiness. If you need to store extras, you can put them in an airtight container at room temperature. Be aware that they will likely lose some of their crunch and freshness the next day.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Microwave Kale Chips 10
      Print Recipe
      5 from 6 votes

      3 Minute Microwave Kale Chips

      These microwave kale chips are a game-changer for anyone looking for a quick, healthy snack. It's also a great way to use up any extra kale on hand. Customize with oil and seasonings of your choice!
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time3 minutes mins
      Total Time3 minutes mins
      Course: Snack
      Servings: 8 chips
      Calories: 50kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • 1 large curly kale leaf
      • 1 teaspoon oil of your choice (olive oil, avocado oil, etc.)
      • 1 teaspoon seasonings of your choice (Bagel seasoning, Italian seasoning, parmesan cheese, nutritional yeast, etc. See above for more ideas.)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Wash kale leaf and dry thoroughly. Rip into 8 medium-sized pieces.
      • Toss kale with oil and seasonings of your choice.
      • Arrange the kale pieces in a single layer on the plate.
      • Microwave kale chips for 2 minutes to start. Use hands to pick up kale leaf and see if it's crispy. If kale chips aren't crispy after the 2 minute mark, microwave in 30 seconds intervals until crispy.
      • Repeat as desired with multiple kale leaves.
      • Enjoy immediately as they lose their crispiness with time.

      Video

      Notes

      Kale Note: This recipe calls for curly kale - this is the most common type of kale you'll see in the store. I have not tested this recipe with lacinato kale, but I assume since it's a flatter kale it would not work very well.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8kale chips | Calories: 50kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Fiber: 1g

      save this microwave kale chips recipe on pinterest:

      Crispy Microwave kale chips

      Try these other kale recipes too:

      • Massaged Kale Salad with Apples
      • Tuscan Farro Soup
      • Chocolate Smoothie made with Kale

      Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats

      January 17, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      There's something incredibly comforting about waking up to a ready-to-go breakfast, especially when it's as delightful as Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats. It's seriously as easy as: prep, grab, and go - perfect for busy mornings. Plus you get to customize with milk, yogurt, and sweetener of your choice.

      Hand holding a jar of banana overnight oats topped with walnuts

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • What ingredients do you need?
      • How do you make these banana overnight oats?
      • Can I use ripe bananas?
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can you make caramelized banana overnight oats ahead of time?
      • How do I store leftovers?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • try these recipes too:
      • Try these other banana recipes too:

      Why you'll love it

      Overnight oats are so simple and convenient. Just mix, set in the fridge overnight, and you'll wake up to a creamy, delicious bowl ready to eat! They are truly a meal prep dream.

      Breakfast jar of banana-flavored overnight oats with a walnut crunch

      Are overnight oats healthy?

      This overnight oats recipe is healthy for a number of reasons. Oats are known for their fiber-rich content, particularly beta-glucan, which can help lower cholesterol and improve heart health.

      The bananas offer natural sweetness. This means even though they provide naturally occuring sugar-there's no added sugars. One medium banana provides just over 100 calories, 3 grams of fiber, and 442 mg of potassium (this is 9% the daily value).

      Oats and bananas are both carbohydrates sources that give us energy. Then, when you combine these with the protein from Greek yogurt and the nourishing omega-3s fat from chia seeds, this breakfast easily becomes a balanced start to your day.

      Ingredients on a kitchen counter

      What ingredients do you need?

      • Rolled Oats: These are whole oats that have been flattened and steamed. They offer a chewy yet creamy texture after sitting overnight.
      • Milk: Choose any milk that fits your dietary preferences. 
      • Greek Yogurt: Adds creaminess and a good amount of protein.
      • Chia Seeds: These tiny seeds are packed with omega-3 fatty acids, fiber, and antioxidants.
      • Bananas: You can use either under ripe or ripe bananas - we prefer slightly ripe bananas for a sweeter flavor and soft texture.
      • Coconut Sugar: This sugar is made by extracting the sap of the coconut palm tree, which is then heated and dried to produce a granulated form that is similar in texture to brown sugar. It also retains small amounts of nutrients found in the coconut palm.
      • Cinnamon: Adds a warm, sweet spice that goes great with banana. Cinnamon is known for its healthy antioxidant properties.

      How do you make these banana overnight oats?

      1. Prepare the Oats Base: In a mason jar, combine rolled oats, milk, Greek yogurt, chia seeds, sweetener, vanilla extract, and cinnamon.
      2. Let it Rest Overnight: Stir the mixture well and let it sit in the fridge overnight or at least 2 hours.
      3. Caramelize the Bananas: You can do this step either the night before or morning of. Toss banana slices in coconut sugar and cinnamon, then cook them in a skillet with oil until golden.
      4. Assemble and Enjoy: Add the caramelized bananas over the oats and top with your choice of toppings.
      Overnight oats base
      Oats topped with caramelized bananas

      Can I use ripe bananas?

      Along with recipes like collagen banana bread and cheesecake "nice" cream, this recipe is a great way to use up ripe bananas. In this recipe, ripe bananas are naturally sweeter and tend to become soft and compote-like in texture when cooked, perfect for those who enjoy a richer sweetness and softer consistency in their oats.

      On the other hand, if you use unripe bananas they will be less sweet and maintain their shape better when heated, offering a firmer texture to your breakfast. 

      Banana Oats 1

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Pair these oats with a cup of coffee or herbal tea for a cozy breakfast.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If the oats mixture is too thick in the morning, adjust the consistency by adding a little more milk.
      • Scaling Tips: This recipe can be easily doubled or tripled. Just make sure you have enough jars to store the oats. You can also combine it all together in a large bowl and portion into a bowl out each morning.

      Customize it your way

      Like all of our other recipes, this Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats is completely customizable. You get to choose what milk, yogurt, and sweetener you want to use.

      • Milk of your choice: Whether it's almond, soy, cow's, or oat milk, pick one that suits your taste and dietary preferences.
      • Yogurt of your choice: We always like to choose Greek yogurt for extra creaminess and protein. You can also sub a plant-based yogurt like almond or coconut for a dairy-free alternative.
      • Liquid sweetener of your choice: Go with classic honey, maple syrup for a rich flavor, agave for a vegan option, or date syrup for a no added sugar option. Whatever you choose - you can't go wrong!
      Taking spoonful of creamy overnight oats with banana slices and walnut topping

      Can you make caramelized banana overnight oats ahead of time?

      Absolutely! Overnight oats are meant to be prepared ahead of time, making your morning routine quicker. 

      How do I store leftovers?

      Store any prepped oats in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge. Note: The bananas will start to get softer as they sit.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Banana Oats 6
      Print Recipe
      Be the first to rate this recipe!

      Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats

      These banana overnight oats are perfect to prep ahead of time. Customize with milk, yogurt, and sweetener of your choice.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time10 minutes mins
      Course: Breakfast
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: overnight oats
      Servings: 2 servings
      Calories: 560kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • 16 ounce mason jar
      • 8 ounce mason jar

      Ingredients

      Oat Base:

      • 1 cup rolled oats
      • ⅔ cup milk of your choice (cow's milk, almond, soy, oat, rice, coconut, cashew, hemp, flax, macadamia milk, etc.)
      • ½ cup Greek yogurt of your choice (plain, vanilla, chocolate, etc.)
      • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
      • 2 teaspoons liquid sweetener of your choice (maple syrup, honey, agave syrup, date syrup, etc.)
      • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

      Caramelized Bananas:

      • 2 medium bananas, sliced
      • 3 teaspoons coconut sugar
      • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
      • 2 teaspoons coconut oil

      Optional Toppings:

      • 2 tablespoons chopped walnuts
      • 2 tablespoons peanut butter
      • Sprinkle of cinnamon
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • In a 16 ounce mason jar or two 8 ounce jars, combine all the ingredients for the oats base. Stir everything together until it's all combined.
      • Place the jar(s) in the refrigerator and let the mixture sit overnight (or for at least 2 hours) to allow the oats to thicken and soften.
      • Either the night before or in the morning, prepare the caramelized bananas. To do so, toss sliced bananas with coconut sugar and cinnamon in a bowl.
      • Heat coconut oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once the oil is hot, add the bananas in a single layer. Let the bananas cook for about 4 minutes on one side until they start to turn golden brown. Then, carefully flip and cook for another 4 minutes.
      • Spoon the caramelized bananas on top of the oats. Then, top with walnuts, peanut butter, and cinnamon, if desired.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1serving (with toppings) | Calories: 560kcal | Carbohydrates: 75g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 90mg | Potassium: 870mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 290mg | Iron: 3.5mg

      save this banana oats recipe on pinterest:

      Caramelized banana oats in a meal prep mason jar

      Try these other banana recipes too:

      • Apple Banana Smoothie
      • High Protein Banana Bread
      • Protein Mug Cake
      • Banana Oatmeal Chocolate Chip Muffins

      Italian Meatloaf

      January 15, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

      This Italian Meatloaf is a delicious twist on the classic meatloaf, allowing you to choose any protein of your choice. This means you get to customize with either beef, turkey, chicken, bison, or a plant-based alternative.

      Large slices of meatloaf next to spatula

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • What is the best type of meat for meatloaf?
      • Is meatloaf healthy?
      • What ingredients do you need?
      • How do you make Italian meatloaf?
        • 1. Mix the ingredients
        • 2. Add to pan
        • 3. Top with cheese and bake.
        • 4. Let it rest
        • 5. Slice and serve
      • What should I serve with meatloaf?
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Making this Italian meatloaf recipe ahead of time
      • How do I store leftovers?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this Italian meatloaf recipe on pinterest:
        • Try these other recipes for a crowd too:

      Why you'll love it

      If you're a meatloaf fan, you're in for a treat with this Italian-inspired version.

      The combination of Italian seasoning, mozzarella, and marinara sauce is bursting with flavor. It's a crowd pleaser because YOU have the flexibility to choose your preferred protein. This means it can suit various dietary and taste preferences-just what Cheerful Choices is all about.

      You'll love this recipe too because it's balanced in protein, carbs, and fat-making for a nourishing weeknight dinner.

      Italian meatloaf on serving pan

      Italian style meatloaf vs regular meatloaf

      What sets Italian Meatloaf apart from the regular version? It all comes down to the flavors and ingredients. In place of the typical meatloaf seasonings like Worcestershire sauce and mustard, for this Italian Meatloaf we're using an Italian seasoning blend. It also features a combo of mozzarella and Parmesan cheese, adding a deliciously cheesy twist. Finally, it's topped with a rich marinara sauce, a flavorful alternative to the classic ketchup topping.

      Ground beef rolls
      Ground beef added to white bowl

      What is the best type of meat for meatloaf?

      The best meat for Italian Meatloaf depends on your preferences and dietary needs. Here's some to consider:

      • Ground beef - traditional meatloaf often uses ground beef for its rich, classic flavor.
      • Ground pork - imparts a tender and juicy texture.
      • Ground turkey or chicken - leaner options that provide less saturated fat but may be slightly less juicy.
      • Ground bison - offers a unique taste with a sweet undertone.
      • Plant-based alternatives - are perfect for vegetarians, those trying to cut back their meat intake, or for a Meatless Monday dish. One of my favorite plant-based proteins to use is Beyond Beef made with pea protein! You can't even tell it's not meat.
      • Or a mixture - feel free to mix and match 1 pound of one meat type with 1 pound of another. We've tested this before with a blend of 1 pound of 97% lean ground beef and 1 pound of ground pork and it's delish!

      Is meatloaf healthy?

      Absolutely! As a dietitian, meatloaf is a staple recipe in our home. Our Italian Meatloaf really packs a nutritious punch. It's a high-protein dish which is beneficial for muscles and overall health.

      Plus, the addition of garlic and onions provide antioxidants which can help lower inflammation. 

      Remember, balance is key in a healthy diet. This meatloaf, when paired with a side of vegetables, definitely makes for a well-rounded meal.

      All Italian meatloaf ingredients on white backdrop

      What ingredients do you need?

      Here is what you'll need to make this Italian style meatloaf.

      • Protein of your choice: Beef, pork, turkey, chicken, bison, or plant-based ground like Beyond Beef.
      • Breadcrumbs: These provide texture and help bind the meatloaf.
      • Parmesan Cheese: Adds a savory kick to the dish.
      • Garlic: Minced garlic cloves for flavor.
      • Onion: Finely chopped onion for added depth.
      • Eggs: To bind everything together.
      • Marinara Sauce: Tomato-based sauce that infuses flavor. We've also experimented using vodka sauce in place of marinara sauce and it's yummy too!
      • Italian Seasoning: A blend of aromatic herbs for that Italian touch.
      • Salt and Pepper: For seasoning.
      • Mozzarella Cheese: Shredded mozzarella for the delicious melted cheese topping.
      Italian Meatloaf topped with melted mozzarella cheese in a white baking dish

      How do you make Italian meatloaf?

      You only need a couple utensils and tools to make this meatloaf.

      1. Mix the ingredients

      Combine your chosen protein, breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, minced garlic, chopped onion, eggs, marinara sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and black pepper in a large mixing bowl. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

      Mixing ingredients together in bowl for meatloaf
      Meatloaf stirred together

      2. Add to pan

      Transfer the meatloaf mixture to a prepared pan and top it with marinara sauce. If you don't have the right pan, you can also use your hands to shape it into a mound.

      Meatloaf process
      Meatloaf process with marinara on top

      3. Top with cheese and bake.

      Finish it off with a layer of shredded mozzarella cheese. Then, pop it in the oven at 350°F and let it cook for about 50-60 minutes or until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F.

      Mozzarella cheese on top of pan

      4. Let it rest

      This step is crucial. Normally, you cook ground meat to 165ºF but since it's resting for 15-20 minutes, it's safe to remove it at 160°F and let it rest to finish coming to temperature. This helps the juices redistribute, making each slice moist and flavorful.

      Baked Italian Meatloaf with a gooey cheese crust, ready to be sliced and served

      5. Slice and serve

      After resting, use a sharp knife to cut into 6 large slices or 12 smaller half slices. One half slice is considered a serving when looking at the nutrition facts for this recipe. Once cooked, serve with your favorite sides.

      What should I serve with meatloaf?

      Italian Meatloaf pairs wonderfully with mashed potatoes, roasted vegetables, or a lemon arugula salad. Don't forget to drizzle extra marinara sauce on top of the meatloaf for a burst of flavor.

      Golden-brown cheesy Italian Meatloaf fresh out of the oven, served alongside green asparagus

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Troubleshooting Tips: To avoid a dry meatloaf, ensure you don't overcook it. You can use a probe meat thermometer to check for doneness if you have one.
      • Scaling Tips: This meatloaf makes double the amount of most meatloaf recipes, so it can definitely serve a crowd. However, if you need more servings, you can double the recipe and use 2 - 7"x11" (2 quart) pans.
      • Save Time: Don't feel like chopping the veggies by hand? Place the onion, carrot, celery, and garlic in a food processor fitted with the steel blade and pulse until the vegetables are minced. 

      Customize it your way

      Like all of our other recipes, this Italian Meatloaf is completely customizable. You get to choose your preferred protein, making it suitable for meat lovers, vegetarians, or anyone in between. 

      • Protein of your choice - Feel free to choose ground beef, turkey, chicken, bison, or plant-based ground like Beyond.
      • Cheese - This recipe calls for both parmesan and mozzarella. If you are vegan, you can substitute for vegan alternatives.
      • Breadcrumbs - If you need this meatloaf to be gluten-free, swap the regular breadcrumbs for gluten-free breadcrumbs.
      Hearty Italian Meatloaf in a ceramic dish, perfect for a comforting family meal.

      Making this Italian meatloaf recipe ahead of time

      You can prepare this Italian meatloaf ahead of time and just don't bake it yet. Refrigerate it until you are ready to bake. 

      Meatloaf is a great option for meal prep too. You can slice and distribute cooked meatloaf slices among meal prep containers to enjoy throughout the week.

      How do I store leftovers?

      Store any leftover meatloaf in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. For longer storage, freeze it for up to 3 months. To reheat, microwave for 1-2 minutes until warm.

      Savory Italian-style meatloaf with a bubbly cheese topping, accompanied by mashed potatoes and green beans

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Italian Meatloaf 18
      Print Recipe
      5 from 4 votes

      Italian Meatloaf

      Italian Meatloaf is a delicious twist on the classic. Plus, you get to customize with beef, turkey, pork, chicken, bison, or a plant-based alternative.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time1 hour hr
      Rest Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: holiday, meal prep
      Servings: 12 slices (~2x3 inches wide each)
      Calories: 250kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish

      Ingredients

      • Cooking spray
      • 2 pounds (32 ounces) ground protein of your choice (lean ground beef, ground pork, ground turkey, ground chicken, ground bison, or plant-based ground)
      • 1 cup breadcrumbs (sub GF breadcrumbs if gluten-free)
      • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese
      • 1 tablespoon minced garlic, about 3 cloves
      • 1 small onion, finely chopped (about ½ cup)
      • 2 large eggs
      • 1 ½ cups marinara sauce or vodka sauce, divided
      • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
      • ½ teaspoon salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Spray a 7"x11" (2 quart) pan with a generous amount of cooking spray.
      • In a large mixing bowl, combine the ground protein, breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, garlic, onion, eggs, 1 cup of the marinara sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and black pepper. Mix well until all the ingredients are combined evenly.
      • Transfer the meatloaf mixture to the loaf pan and top with remaining ½ cup of marinara sauce followed by the mozzarella cheese.
      • Bake meatloaf uncovered for about 50-60 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 160°F (70°C).
      • Remove the meatloaf from the oven and let it rest for 10 minutes before slicing. Slice and serve with your favorite side dishes.

      Video

      Notes

      Resting Note: As this will be resting for 15-20 minutes after taking it from the oven, it is safe to remove at 160°F and let it rest to finish coming to temperature. This helps the juices redistribute, making the meatloaf juicier.
      Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for 97% lean ground beef. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1slice | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 460mg | Potassium: 400mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 200mg | Iron: 3mg

      save this Italian meatloaf recipe on pinterest:

      Slice of meatloaf next to blistered green beans and mashed potatoes

      Try these other recipes for a crowd too:

      • Bejeweled Rice
      • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
      • Sausage & Green Beans Sheet Pan Meal

      Protein Cookie Dough

      January 12, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

      Craving a sweet yet healthy dessert? This Protein Cookie Dough recipe is perfect for you! It's packed with natural sweetness from Medjool dates and packs a protein punch with your choice of protein powder. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite add-ins like chocolate chips or nuts.

      A gold spoonful of chocolate chip protein cookie dough

      Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Natural Delights. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • Are medjool dates healthy?
      • What ingredients do you need for protein powder cookie dough?
      • How do you make this edible protein cookie dough?
      • Can I make it without a food processor?
      • Can I make my own oat flour?
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can you make this protein dough ahead of time?
      • How do I store leftovers?
      • Could I bake this cookie dough if I wanted to?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this protein cookie dough recipe on pinterest:
        • Want more? Try these other recipes made with protein powder:

      Why you'll love it

      Let's be honest… who didn't love sneaking cookie dough as a kid? Unfortunately, it can be unsafe due to the raw eggs and uncooked flour.

      Instead, this edible version uses ingredients that are safe to eat without cooking! It's also…

      • Nutrient-Rich: Each scoop of this cookie dough is filled with wholesome ingredients like Medjool dates and oat flour, providing essential nutrients in every bite.
      • Customizable: Love nuts? More of a chocolate fan? This recipe is all about making it your own with your choice of add-ins.
      • No-Bake Ease: Forget the oven; this recipe is as simple as mixing and chilling. Perfect for your busy schedule!
      A hand picking up a scoop of no-bake protein cookie dough with chocolate chips

      Is protein cookie dough healthy?

      This cookie dough is unique because it uses protein powder to add a significant protein boost. As a dietitian, I'm always talking about the importance of protein in my "Coaching + Cooking" program. Protein is important for satiety, muscle repair, and supporting our immune system. By choosing a high-quality protein powder, like your favorite whey or plant-based option, you're adding a nutritious element to this treat.

      It also uses a base of Medjool dates and oat flour-both filled with fiber and important nutrients.

      Rolled protein dough bites, a portable and healthy snack option, made with Medjool dates

      Are medjool dates healthy?

      Medjool dates have started to become more popular, especially with viral recipes in the spotlight like Date "Snickers" and date barks with tasty flavor combos like Chocolate Peppermint and Coconut Almond! Many people don't know this but Medjool dates are actually considered a fresh fruit, not a dried fruit. They have a caramel-like taste, making them perfect to satisfy any sweet tooth. Since they're a fruit, all their sugars are naturally occurring, meaning there are no added sugars. They're also a source of potassium, iron, and satiating fiber.

      When it comes to picking out Medjool dates, we always like to buy a pack of Natural Delight Medjool dates online or at my local grocery store. We're using Medjool dates for this recipe because they tend to have a sweeter and softer texture that easily breaks down into a dough consistency. 

      In October 2022, I was actually able to help harvest dates and see the full process they go through to reach our grocery shelves! Did you know each date palm tree produces around 200-250 pounds of dates? SO. COOL.

      Bowl of Medjool dates
      Mackenzie Burgess in front of Medjool date palms

      What ingredients do you need for protein powder cookie dough?

      • Medjool Dates: These naturally sweet fruits are the perfect base for our cookie dough. Look for them in the fresh produce section of your grocery store, often placed on a display shelf nearby.
      • Protein Powder: Choose your favorite - whey, pea, or any plant-based option. It's all about what works for your dietary needs.
      • Oat Flour: A gluten-free and fiber-rich ingredient that gives a great texture similar to regular flour. You can find it in the baking aisle or make your own by grinding oats (more on this below!)
      • Peanut Butter: A source of healthy fats and flavor. Feel free to sub in another nut or seed butter of your choice for different dietary needs.
      Protein Cookie Dough Pinterest Regular Pins

      How do you make this edible protein cookie dough?

      This recipe comes together in no time! Just grab your food processor and a few pantry ingredients.

      • Soften the Dates: Microwave the Medjool dates for 20 seconds to soften them. This makes them easier to blend.
      • Blend Dates: Add the softened dates to a food processor and blend briefly to break them down into a paste.
      • Add Ingredients: Mix in the protein powder, oat flour, milk, peanut butter, vanilla extract, salt, chocolate chips, and any other add-ins. Blend until just combined. You don't want to overblend or it will become mushy.
      • Chill and Scoop: Let the mixture chill in the refrigerator, then scoop out your desired amount and enjoy. For an even firmer texture, chill longer or chill in the freezer.
      Blending protein cookies batter

      Can I make it without a food processor?

      It's possible to make this protein cookie dough with a high-powered blender. However, we recommend using a food processor for the best results in achieving the perfect texture.

      Can I make my own oat flour?

      Don't have oat flour or don't want to buy it? You can easily make your own oat flour. Simply blend ⅔ cup of regular rolled oats in a blender or food processor until they reach a fine, flour-like consistency. This will give you about ½ cup of oat flour needed for this recipe.

      Spoonful of cookie dough made with protein powder
      Bite of protein powder cookie dough

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Pair this cookie dough with a cup of milk or hot tea for a delightful dessert. You could even pair it with sliced fruit or yogurt for a quick and balanced snack during your work week.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If the dough is somewhat sticky, lightly dust your hands with oat flour while rolling.
      • Scaling Tips: Want to make a larger amount? Simply double or triple the ingredients and use a large food processor. This makes the dough perfect for meal prep or sharing with friends!
      Creamy peanut butter protein dough with chocolate chips, pre-scooped servings

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this cookie dough is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder and add-ins you want to use.

      • Protein powder of your choice: Feel free to use both your favorite flavor and type of powder. We usually use vanilla protein powder but you could experiment with chocolate or cookies and creme for a unique variation. Use a protein powder that works for your dietary needs such as whey, pea, or others.
      • Add-ins of your choice: If you like a classic chocolate chip cookie dough, then simply add more mini chocolate chips to the "¼ cup add-ins of your choice". This will give you a total of ½ cup mini chocolate chips in the dough. Otherwise, you can mix it up and add other creative mix-ins. Here are some ideas:
        • Chopped nuts
        • Dried fruit
        • Pumpkin seeds
        • Sprinkles
        • Toasted coconut flakes
        • Cacao nibs
        • Protein crisps
      You get to use any protein powder of your choice
      You get to use any add-ins of your choice

      Can you make this protein dough ahead of time?

      Definitely! This is a great recipe to meal prep ahead of time and store in the fridge for a quick, healthy snack anytime.

      How do I store leftovers?

      Store cookie dough bites or jar in an airtight container for up to 7 days in the fridge or up to a month in the freezer.

      To freeze, place individual scoops on a parchment-lined baking sheet, freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer-safe zip-top bag or reusable stasher bag.

      Storing extra cookie dough bites in reusable storage bag

      Could I bake this cookie dough if I wanted to?

      You can actually turn this into more of a cooked cookie if you want. To do this, partially flatten a 1-inch cookie dough bite and the microwave for 30-40 seconds. Let it cool and it should firm up into a soft cookie. Similarly, you can try baking at 350ºF for ~15 minutes to achieve a similar effect.

      Note: We've only briefly tested baking this cookie dough. It's primarily designed to be enjoyed without cooking, as the texture and taste are best then.

      Homemade protein cookie dough balls with chocolate chips on a grey plate

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Protein Cookie Dough 7
      Print Recipe
      Be the first to rate this recipe!

      Protein Cookie Dough

      Craving a healthy dessert? Try this Protein Cookie Dough with zero added sugars. You get to choose protein powder and add-ins of your choice too!
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Chill Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time35 minutes mins
      Course: Sweet Treat Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: healthy dessert
      Servings: 16 1-inch scoops
      Calories: 120kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • Large Food Processor
      • Cookie Scooper

      Ingredients

      • 1 cup Natural Delights Whole Medjool Dates, pitted (about 8 to 10 dates)
      • ½ cup protein powder of your choice (Feel free to use your favorite flavor and type such as vanilla, chocolate, etc. As well as whey, soy, pea, etc.)
      • ½ cup oat flour see note on making your own from rolled oats
      • ¼ cup milk of your choice (cow's milk, almond, soy, oat, rice, coconut, cashew, hemp, flax, macadamia milk, etc.)
      • ¼ cup creamy peanut butter or nut butter of your choice (almond butter, cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, pumpkin seed butter, sesame tahini, walnut butter, hazelnut butter, etc.)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • ¼ cup mini chocolate chips
      • ¼ cup add-ins of your choice (more mini chocolate chips, chopped nuts, dried fruit, pumpkin seeds, sprinkles, toasted coconut flakes, cacao nibs, protein crisps, etc.)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Microwave Medjool dates for 20 seconds to soften.
      • Add Medjool dates to a food processor and blend for 10 seconds until mostly broken down.
      • Then, add protein powder, oat flour, milk, peanut butter, vanilla extract, salt, mini chocolate chips, and add-ins of your choice. Blend on low for about 10-20 seconds until just incorporated.
      • Chill the food processor bowl in the refrigerator for 30 minutes. Then, scoop out with a cookie scooper, roll into 1-inch balls with your hands, or transfer to a jar to enjoy.
      • Storage: Store cookie dough bites or jar in an airtight container for up to 7 days in the fridge or up to a month in the freezer. To freeze, place individual scoops on a parchment-lined baking sheet, freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer-safe zip-top bag or reusable stasher bag.

      Video

      View this post on Instagram

      A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

      Notes

      Oat Flour Note: Don't have oat flour or don't want to buy it? You can easily make your own oat flour. Simply blend ⅔ cup of regular rolled oats in a blender or food processor until they reach a fine, flour-like consistency. This will give you about ½ cup of oat flour needed for this recipe.
      Dough Texture Note: If the dough is somewhat sticky when you’re attempting to scoop or roll, you may want to chill it for a bit longer, or even let it sit in the freezer for 10 minutes. You could also use a bit of oat flour on your hands when rolling to prevent it from sticking.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1scoop | Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Calcium: 31mg

      save this protein cookie dough recipe on pinterest:

      Save this edible protein cookie dough to meal prep

      Want more? Try these other recipes made with protein powder:

      • Protein Mug Cake
      • Vanilla Coffee and Medjool Date Protein Shake
      • High Protein Banana Bread

      Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans and Kale

      January 11, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 9 Comments

      This Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans recipe is perfect for those chilly nights when you crave something warm and comforting. It contains a mix of savory proteins, hearty whole grains, and leafy greens of your choice. It makes lots of leftovers and is freezer friendly. Plus, you can easily make it vegan.

      A bowl of Tuscan white bean and farro soup topped with shaved parmesan and kale.

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • What is farro?
      • Farro cooking guide
      • Is farro healthy?
      • What do you need to make tuscan soup?
      • How long does it take to make?
      • How to make this farro soup
        • Start with the base
        • Add the farro
        • Add the veggies
        • Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes
        • Add broth
        • Finish with greens and beans
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Is this recipe vegan friendly?
      • What leafy greens should I use?
        • But isn't kale on the dirty dozen list?
        • Is organic better?
      • How do I store leftovers?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this farro soup recipe on pinterest:

      This post was first published on November 1, 2020. It was updated on January 11, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

      Why you'll love it

      It's always a good idea to have a soup recipe in your back pocket for those chilly months. This tuscan farro soup is hearty, nutritious, and flavorful. It's also freezer-friendly or can be stored in the fridge for several days, making it perfect for meal prep.

      What is farro?

      Farro has been such a fun whole grain to incorporate into recipes. It has a chewy texture and nutty flavor, making it perfect to mix up your typical rice routine.

      It's super versatile too-throw it over salads, in meal prep bowls, or as your base for healthy shrimp jambalaya.

      Farro cooking guide

      You may find different kinds of farro in the store. Here's how to adjust the cooking time.

      • Pearled Farro: Requires only about 15-20 minutes of boiling. It's processed to remove the bran, which shortens the cooking time.
      • Semi-Pearled Farro: Cook for approximately 25-30 minutes. This type has part of the bran removed but retains more nutrients than pearled farro.
      • Whole Farro: Needs the longest cooking time, typically around 35-40 minutes, as it retains the entire bran and germ layer.

      If your package of farro doesn't say what kind it is, just check on it at the 30 minute mark and cook longer if needed. 

      Hearty vegetable and farro stew garnished with cheese flakes, perfect for a cozy meal.

      Is farro healthy?

      This Tuscan soup has a blend of ingredients that support our health and well-being. Let me break down some of the dietitian-approved benefits:

      • Farro: A whole grain that's not only a delicious base for this soup but also a powerhouse of nutrition. While specific health benefits of farro are still being researched, whole grains like farro are known for their high fiber and protein content. Both protein and fiber are crucial for maintaining good digestive health and satiety.
      • Cannellini Beans: These beans are a fantastic source of plant-based protein, offering about 7 grams per 100g serving . Research shows beans may help regulate blood sugar levels, contribute to a healthy heart, and may even have cancer-fighting properties due to their high antioxidant content . 
      • Vegetables: The carrots, celery, and dark leafy greens in this soup are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Carrots are a great source of beta-carotene, which is vital for eye health, while celery adds crunch and hydration due to its high water content. Leafy greens like kale are nutrient-dense, offering vitamins A, C, and K, as well as calcium and iron, essential for maintaining healthy bones and blood cells.
      Spoonful of soup

      What do you need to make tuscan soup?

      You'll need a few simple ingredients for this recipe:

      • Bacon or sausage is used to provide some savory umami flavors (omit if you are vegetarian or vegan).
      • Farro is a chewy grain that gives the soup some bite.
      • Carrots, celery, and onion, known as mirepoix, provide color and important nutrients.
      • Dark leafy greens of your choice are added at the end.
      • Cannellini beans (white beans) are a great source of plant based protein.
      • Spices pack in natural flavor and make this soup anything but boring.
      • Parmesan cheese adds creamy texture and umami flavor on top.
      Rustic Tuscan soup with beans, grains, and greens, topped with cheese in a white bowl.

      How long does it take to make?

      I love one pot meals because they come together in no time and make for easy clean up. This one pot soup is ready in less than 1 hour. It's one of my favorites to put on the table on a chilly night. I like to serve this soup with crusty, whole grain bread and salad.Try these other one pot meals like bean curry or tomato basil pasta.

      Nutritious and filling white bean soup with farro, served with a cheese garnish

      How to make this farro soup

      This one pot recipe uses minimal dishes and simple ingredients. Here's how to make it in under one hour.

      Start with the base

      Heat oil in a pot then add the bacon or sausage, and cook for about 3 minutes. It may look like a lot of oil at this point, but this makes a flavorful base to cook the rest of the ingredients in.

      Cooking bacon

      Add the farro

      Add the farro to the pot and cook, stirring often, until the grains are slightly darker, about 2 minutes. This toasting step enhances the nutty flavor of the farro.

      Adding farro

      Add the veggies

      Mix in onion, carrots, celery, garlic, and seasonings. Cook until everything is coated and the vegetables start to soften a bit.

      Add the veggies

      Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes

      Adding the tomato paste allows it to integrate into the flavors before adding the broth. You'll notice the mixture will be a bit darker red after stirring it in.

      Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes
      Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes

      Add broth

      Bring to a boil, then simmer until farro is tender, about 30 minutes. You can check a grain of farro to see if it's tender-just let it cool off before testing because it will be piping HOT.

      Add broth

      Finish with greens and beans

      Stir in kale and cannellini beans, cooking until the kale is wilted and the beans are heated through, adding a burst of nutrition and color.

      Finish with greens and beans
      Finish with greens and beans

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Pair this soup with crusty, whole-grain bread and a side salad for a complete meal.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If the farro is too chewy, simmer for 5 more minutes.
      • Scaling Tips: This recipe easily doubles or triples for larger crowds. Just increase the ingredients proportionally.
      Dipping bread in homemade Tuscan kale and white bean soup with a sprinkle of parmesan on top

      Is this recipe vegan friendly?

      If you are vegetarian or vegan, simply choose a "protein of your choice" that's plant-based such as Beyond sausage. Or you can omit this section entirely. Likewise, you can omit the parmesan cheese or substitute for nutritional yeast to bring that cheesy flavor.

      What leafy greens should I use?

      Like all of my other recipes, this Tuscan soup is completely customizable. Dark leafy greens are the perfect way to add some extra color into the soup. My favorite green to use in this tuscan farro soup is kale, but you can also use greens like escarole, chard, or spinach!

      If you have leftover kale, tear leaves into pieces and microwave into homemade kale chips.

      Leafy greens of your choice including spinach, kale, and chard

      But isn't kale on the dirty dozen list?

      Kale sometimes gets bad rap for being on the Dirty Dozen list, meaning it'd one of the crops containing the most pesticides. Even though it's on the list, that doesn't mean you should avoid kale. Kale is a rich source of vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and gut-boosting fiber. Just be sure to give it a good rinse before adding into recipes.

      Is organic better?

      If you are worried about pesticides, you can opt for organic produce. However, recent literature shows that there's no significant difference in nutrient content, nutrient absorption or health risk in choosing organic over conventional foods. Ultimately, wash your produce before eating it and focus on getting a variety of colorful fruits and vegetables in your diet.

      Mason jar of soup

      How do I store leftovers?

      Since this recipe makes quite a bit, plan on having leftovers for a few days or freezing it for another quick meal in the future. You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days or freeze for 4-6 months. Perfect for meal prep!


      Enjoy this comforting Tuscan soup on a cold evening or as a wholesome meal any day of the week. It's a delightful way to warm up and nourish yourself!

      Nutritious and filling white bean soup with farro stored in a mason jar

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 22
      Print Recipe
      4.55 from 42 votes

      One Pot Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans

      This farro stew is the perfect combination of savory protein, hearty whole grains, and healthy vegetables. Easy to make, quick cleanup, and freezer friendly!
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time40 minutes mins
      Total Time50 minutes mins
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Cuisine: Italian
      Keyword: dairy free, farro, farro soup, leftovers, meal prep, one pot dinner, soup, tuscan
      Servings: 8 servings
      Calories: 180kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (olive oil, canola oil, avocado oil, etc)
      • Protein of your choice (6 slices uncooked bacon, 3 uncooked sausage links, OR 3 cooked sausage links. Whatever you choose, chop it into small ½-inch pieces) - see note for more details
      • 1 cup farro, uncooked
      • 1 small white onion, diced
      • 1 cup carrots, sliced
      • 3 celery stalks, sliced
      • 2 cloves garlic, minced
      • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
      • Salt and pepper, to taste
      • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
      • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
      • 12 cups (96 ounces) low-sodium vegetable broth
      • 6 packed cups dark leafy greens of your choice, roughly chopped (Kale is my favorite to use. You can also use spinach, escarole, or chard)
      • 1 - 15- ounce can cannellini beans, rinsed
      • Shaved or shredded parmesan cheese, to taste (omit if vegan)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Heat oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add bacon and cook for about 3 minutes.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 2
      • Add farro into pot and cook, stirring often, until grains are slightly darker, about 2 minutes.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 3
      • Add onion, carrots, celery, garlic, and Italian seasoning to pot. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Cook and stir occasionally until everything is coated, about 2 minutes.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 4
      • Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes, and saute for 1 minute.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 5
      • Add broth to pot and bring to a boil. Then, reduce the heat, cover, and let simmer until farro is tender, about 30 minutes.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 7
      • Finally, stir kale and cannellini beans into soup and cook until kale is wilted, about 2 minutes.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 8
      • Ladle hot soup into bowls and sprinkle with parmesan cheese, if desired. Store leftovers in fridge for up to 4 days or freeze for 4-6 months.
        Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 16

      Video

      Notes

      Protein choice: You can either use bacon or sausage for this recipe. If using a traditional pork bacon or pork sausage, you will only need 1 tablespoon of oil since these pork products release oil as well. Feel free to use any of your favorites.
      You could also use a leaner turkey bacon, chicken sausage, or grass-fed beef sausage. However, since these products have less fat, it's recommend to add 2 tablespoons oil to the pot in this case.
      Finally, if you want to make this soup plant-based, feel free to add ~2 ounces plant-based sausage like this one from Beyond.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1serving | Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 340mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 4g

      save this farro soup recipe on pinterest:

      Pinterest Mackenzie will do

      Your Guide to Setting SMART Nutrition Goals

      January 9, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      In this post, we'll dive into the concept of SMART goals, talk about what each letter means, and learn how to set SMART nutrition goals that work for you.

      Have you ever set a goal, like improving a skill or sticking to a healthier routine, and then found yourself slipping back into old habits? Coming from a dietitian who coaches clients, we've seen this happen countless times. In fact, it's super common especially with the daily grind and curveballs of life.

      That's why the SMART goal-setting method can be a game-changer. It acts like a guide, helping you frame your goals more clearly and realistically. This method can be a key in making your ambitions happen, despite the challenges. Let's explore how it works.

      (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Ravin Garrett.)

      Meal planner surrounded by colorful fruits and veggies

      Table of Contents

      • Why SMART nutrition goal setting matters
      • What does S.M.A.R.T. Mean?
      • S: Specific
        • Example
      • M: Measurable
        • Example 
      • A: Achievable
        • Example
      • R: Relevant
        • Example
      • T: Time-bound
        • Example
      • How to have long-term success with goals
        • Set mini goals
        • Celebrate milestones
        • Have accountability
        • How technology can help
      • Key takeaways
      • Coaching + Cooking Program
        • save this SMART nutrition goals guide on Pinterest:

      Why SMART nutrition goal setting matters

      Goal setting can help put those seemingly out-of-reach ideas into an actionable plan. The key is creating personalized goals. This allows you to create a clear vision you can stick to long-term.

      Reaching BIG goals doesn't happen overnight.That's why it's important to split it up into "mini" SMART goals. Talking through mini goals is something registered dietitian, Mackenzie, works on with clients all the time in the "Coaching + Cooking" program.

      With smaller goals, you can slowly chip away at it and celebrate these milestones on your journey. Using SMART goals also gives you confidence and accountability needed to reach the goal. 

      Dietitian helping you set nutrition goals on computer

      What does S.M.A.R.T. Mean?

      SMART goals create more of a guided and clear-cut approach to those resolutions or habits. "SMART" is an acronym, with each letter having its own purpose to help you stay on track. 

      Here's what it stands for: S is for Specific, M is for Measurable, A is for Achievable, R is for Relevant, and T is for Time-bound. Let's dive into each letter and how they can apply to our goals. 

      Want to see them all spelled out on one page? Download our SMART Goals PDF here.

      Smart Goals PDF with examples for each letter

      S: Specific

      Specific means having crystal clear objectives and being as precise as possible on the goals that you want to achieve. Goals are not achieved overnight, so visualizing even the nitty-gritty details can help make that goal a reality. 

      Leafy greens

      Example

      For example, a goal like "Get more vegetables" or "Buy salads to eat all week" may sound like a solid statement, but it's still too broad. Instead, you might say something more specific like, "Purchase three different types of salad kits at Trader Joe's by Sunday evening, and prepare a salad for lunch on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday." 

      Here's another example of a specific goal: "Include leafy greens like kale, spinach, or chard in at least one meal daily." 

      Adding these three leafy greens is a great way to add vegetables to your diet for overall health and well-being. Load up on your veggies with a fruit smoothie with kale for breakfast to fill the body with vitamins and antioxidants to go into the day feeling your best. 

      Kale smoothie

      M: Measurable

      Measurable means having a way to track progress and measure the accuracy of your goals. Drinking more water is a goal that can use metrics to measure its progress along the way. There have been several new innovative ways to track water intake too. You might try tracking your water intake in an app or purchasing a motivational water bottle that gives you encouraging words and tracks your water intake throughout the day. 

      Example 

      Expanding "drink more water" into "Track my water and drink eight glasses every day" gives a way to measure the goal's progress. 

      You could track this goal by using water tracking apps or creating a water tracking sheet to put on your fridge and use stickers to mark your water.

      A: Achievable

      Achievable means keeping it real when setting goals. Be real honest with yourself: Can this goal happen in your time frame or based on your current finances? It can be easy to bite off more than you can chew, so ensure your goals align with your reality. 

      Instead of aiming for a goal that seems super far-fetched, think about creating multiple mini goals that allow you to see the goal as a journey. This can make it feel more attainable. Utilizing what you currently have allows you to achieve a goal anytime, even with limited resources.

      Example

      "Get in at least 30 minutes of moderate-intensity exercise 7x per week" may seem achievable to some, but to others, it may be a steep hill to climb. You could always break down this goal step-by-step, such as incorporating 10-15 minutes of low-moderate intensity for at least 2x weeks, then gradually increasing over the next few weeks. Instead of aiming for the goal immediately, this approach can make it feel less overwhelming and attainable in the future. 

      Writing down goals

      R: Relevant

      Relevant means setting goals that matter the most to your overall health and well-being. In other words, don't continually change goals to meet the latest health fad you hear about - stay focused on what YOU value.

      Also, make sure it's a goal that you'll want to stick with for a while. Progress takes time. If you are highly interested in the components of your goal, being able to stay on track will be a breeze. 

      Example

      Let's say you're very interested in learning more knife skills when it comes to chopping vegetables. And perhaps you learn best through short-form video or hands-on help rather than reading articles or just looking at photos. A relevant goal could be to "find one Instagram Reel or TikTok per week that shows off how to cut various fruits and vegetables, and then practice this method afterwards."

      Side note: Our Instagram @cheerfulchoices is choke-full of helpful kitchen hacks and cutting tutorials to watch. Plus, our "Coaching + Cooking" program is designed to give you hands-on help in the kitchen if that's one of your goals.

      Presenting Instagram @cheerfulchoices

      T: Time-bound

      Time-bound means putting a deadline or even a light sense of urgency to your goal. Incorporating this time element allows you to track progress with metrics. 

      A time-bound goal could also help with procrastination since the goal will have a specific time carved out to complete it each day with reminders to aid in success. 

      Example

      Example: "On Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, set your alarm for 5:00 a.m. and meditate before you start your busy day. Do this for the next two weeks."  This goal allows you to work around potential time restrictions and can kick start a calm day.

      Setting SMART goals on a notebook

      How to have long-term success with goals

      Now, let's make these goals last! These SMART goals allow you to tailor each letter into a way that can set you up for long-term success. Here are some other tips to keep the motivation going. 

      Set mini goals

      If you have one BIG goal, it can be helpful to break it up in 5, 10, or maybe even 20 mini goals over the course of a month to a year. Even small goals can create huge progress in your health. 

      For example, the American Heart Association states that individuals should engage in at least 150 minutes per week of moderate physical activity. Rather than trying to hit that all in one, perhaps try a daily 30-minute stroll to get the necessary requirements. 

      Celebrate milestones

      Hooray! Achieving a goal for a consistent amount of time shows steps towards making it a habit. Those small "mini goals" will turn into monumental milestones to celebrate. Don't brush it off and move onto the next goal too quickly. Take time to celebrate! Here's some ideas:

      • Throw yourself a mini celebration by creating your favorite nourishing dessert like "Snickers" Dates or a Protein Mug Cake. Bonus points for including a party hat, candle, and decorations! 
      • A night out to a local arts and crafts spot with those that are closest to you or your accountability buddy.
      • Treat yourself to a day of relaxation at the spa.
      • What's your jam that gave you motivation? Create a celebratory playlist with some of those songs that motivated you to push harder and dance away!
      Protein mug cake
      Snickers Dates

      Have accountability

      There may be a time where you need a little motivation along the way, this can even be someone just to be a listening ear or right there next to you at the gym. Accountability can be a huge factor in the consistency and long-term success of your goals. 

      As a registered dietitian nutritionist, I'm always SO excited to be your accountability partner. In my "Coaching + Cooking" program, we get to chat 1:1 and set SMART goals that work for you. Interested in learning more? Read about the program and book a FREE discovery call here!

      Virtual cooking session

      How technology can help

      New apps and technologies can help you track your SMART goals and even recommend personalized guidance. A wearable wrist watch to track workouts or encourage meditation is a great tool to increase physical activity. Various free apps can help in initial meal planning ideas, stress relief, exercising, and goal tracking too. You may also find goal inspiration on places like Tiktok or Instagram.

      Key takeaways

      As we step into a new year, it's a chance to embrace change and kickstart fresh endeavors. SMART goals serve as a great tool to bring your vision boards. Keep in mind, achieving goals is a journey that requires time and patience, and it's perfectly fine to modify them along the way.


      Need help from an expert? Our "Coaching + Cooking" program connects you with Mackenzie (a registered dietitian) who's ready to help with your nutrition and cooking goals in 2024! We even do personalized meal plans!

      Smiling in the kitchen

      Coaching + Cooking Program

      If you need more hands-on help with creating your SMART goals, check out this unique "Coaching + Cooking" program. In this program, you'll meet virtually with a dietitian and break down your nutrition and cooking goals into doable weekly goals. You'll also learn how to whip up easy and nutritious meals in the comfort of your own kitchen. Plus, having a registered dietitian on your side can help you stay accountable, achieve your goals, and reap the many benefits that come with living a healthy lifestyle. 

      Click here to learn more about the "Coaching + Cooking" program!

      save this SMART nutrition goals guide on Pinterest:

      Dietitian advice on setting nutrition smart goals

      Ravin headshot

      About the guest contributor: Ravin Garrett is a Nutrition MS student at Abilene Christian University, with a background in dietetics from Texas Southern University, planning to become a dietitian soon. With experience as a formula room tech and health coach, she applies SMART goals to assist a diverse range of clients, from those with diabetes to cancer. Her interests include media dietetics, sustainable food systems, and health coaching.

      • « Previous Page
      • 1
      • 2
      • 3
      • 4
      • 5
      • …
      • 7
      • Next Page »

      Hi, I'm Mackenzie!

      Welcome to Cheerful Choices! Here you’ll find customizable recipes with ingredients “of your choice.” As a dietitian, I also help you gain kitchen confidence through my “Coaching + Cooking” program.

      More about me

      Meal Prep Ready

      • Pistachio Lettuce Wraps 14 scaled
        Meal Prep Chicken Lettuce Wraps with Pistachios
      • Customizable Power Bowl Featured Image
        Customizable Power Bowl Recipe Template
      • Customizable Protein Pancakes Featured Image
        Customizable Protein Pancakes
      • One Pot Chickpea Pasta 13 scaled
        One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta

      Dietitian Pro Tips

      • Meal Plan2
        Your Guide to Setting SMART Nutrition Goals
      • C49A4215
        10 Immune Boosting Foods + Immunity Shot Recipe to Try
      • Quinoa Kitchen Confidence
        5 Tips to Improve Your Kitchen Confidence
      • Vegetable Curry 4 scaled
        How to Reuse Leftover Food

      Footer

      • Contact
      • Shop
      • Privacy Policy
      • Terms
      • ↑ back to top

      Rate This Recipe

      Your vote:




      Let us know what you thought of this recipe:

      Loved it! I customized this recipe by using...
      My family loved this one!
      Thank you for sharing this recipe, it was delicious!

      Or write in your own words:

      A rating is required
      A name is required
      An email is required